Canon Digital Camera 3822B002 User Manual

E
INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL  
E
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thank you for purchasing a Canon product.  
The EOS-1D Mark IV is a top-of-the-line, high-performance EOS  
DIGITAL SLR camera featuring a large, fine-detail CMOS sensor with  
approx. 16.10 effective megapixels, Dual “DIGIC 4”, high-precision and  
high-speed 45-point AF (39 cross-type points), approx. 10 fps  
continuous shooting, Live View shooting, and Full HD (Full High-  
Definition) movie shooting.  
The camera is highly responsive to any shooting situation, provides  
many features for demanding shoots, highly reliable even in harsh  
environments, and compatible with a wide range of accessories to  
expand shooting possibilities.  
Take a Few Test Shots to Familiarize Yourself with the  
Camera  
With a digital camera, you can immediately view the image you have  
captured. While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how  
they come out. You can then better unstanthe camera.  
To avoid botched pictures and accidentirst read the Safety Warnings  
(p.266,267) and Handling Preca(p12,13).  
Testing the Camera Bfore Use and Liability  
After shooting, playback and check whether the image has been  
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the  
images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon  
cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.  
Copyrights  
Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded  
images of people and certain subjects for anything but private  
enjoyment. Also be aware that certain public performances, exhibitions,  
etc., may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment.  
Memory Cards  
In this manual, “CF card” refers to CompactFlash cards and “SD card”  
refers to SD/SDHC cards. “Card” refers to all memory cards used to  
record images or movies. The camera does not come with a card for  
recording images/movies. Please purchase it separately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Item Check List  
Before starting, check that all the following items have been included  
with your camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.  
Camera  
(with eyecup, body cap,  
and battery  
Battery Pack  
LP-E4  
(with protective cover)  
Battery Charger  
LC-E4  
compartment cap)  
Wide Strap L6  
Interfacle  
20
Stereo AV Cable  
AVC-DC400ST  
Cable Protector  
(with attaching  
screw, p.26)  
EOS DIGITAL  
Solution Disk  
(Software)  
Software  
Instruction  
Manual  
(1) Instruction Manual (this booklet)  
(2) Pocket Guide  
Quick start guide to shooting.  
(3) CD-ROM Guide  
Guide to the provided software (EOS DIGITAL  
Solution Disk) and Software Instruction Manuals.  
* Be careful not to lose any of the above items.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Conventions Used in this Manual  
Icons in this Manual  
<6>  
<5>  
<9>  
<0>  
: Indicates the Main Dial.  
: Indicates the Quick Control Dial.  
: Indicates the Multi-controller.  
: Indicates the setting button.  
9, 8 : Indicates that the respective function remains active for 6  
sec. or 16 sec. respectively after you let go of the button.  
* In this manual, the icons and markings indicating the camera’s buttons, dials,  
and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the  
LCD monitor.  
3: Indicates a function which can be changed by pressing the  
<M> button and changing the setting.  
(p.**) : Reference page numbers for more inormation.  
: Warning to prevent shooting plems
: Supplemental informatio
: Tip or advice for better sg.  
: Problem-solving advice.  
Basic Assumptions  
 All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch  
is already set to <1> or <J> (p.34).  
 <5> operations explained in this manual assume that the power  
switch is already set to <J>.  
 It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are  
set to the default.  
 It is assumed that a CF card <f> or SD/SDHC memory card <g> is  
used.  
 For explanatory purposes, the instructions show the camera attached  
with an EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Chapters  
Introduction  
2
27  
55  
Camera basics.  
Getting Started  
1
Image Settings  
2
Image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, etc.  
Setting the AF and Drive Modes  
93  
103  
125  
141  
155  
183  
189  
203  
3
4
5
Setting the AF mode, AF point, and drive mode.  
Exposure Control  
Metering mode, shooting mode, flashand other settings.  
Live View shooting  
Shoot photos while vhe LCD monitor.  
Shooting Moves  
6
7
Shoot movies while viewing the LCD monitor.  
Image Playback  
Playing back photos and movies.  
Sensor Cleaning  
8
9
Auto cleaning, appending Dust Delete Data, and other procedures.  
Printing Images  
Printing with PictBridge and using DPOF for print orders.  
Customizing the Camera  
10  
11  
Setting Custom Functions (C.Fn), My Menu, etc.  
241  
Reference  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Contents  
Introduction  
Item Check List.................................................................................................. 3  
Conventions Used in this Manual...................................................................... 4  
Chapters............................................................................................................ 5  
Index to Features ............................................................................................ 10  
Handling Precautions ...................................................................................... 12  
Quick Start Guide ............................................................................................ 14  
Nomenclature.................................................................................................. 16  
Getting Started  
27  
1
Charging the Battery ....................................................................................... 28  
Installing and Removing the Battery................................................................ 32  
Using a Household Power Outlet (Sold separately) ........................................ 33  
Turning on the Power ...................................................................................... 34  
Installing and Removing the Card ................................................................ 36  
Attaching and Detaching a Lens ................................................................ 39  
Basic Operation.................................................................................... 40  
Menu Operations............................................................................... 44  
Menu Settings ..................................................................................... 46  
Before You Start.......................................................................................... 49  
Setting the Interface Lanuae .................................................................... 49  
Setting the Date and Time............................................................................ 49  
Formatting the Card ..................................................................................... 50  
Set the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off ....................................................... 52  
Silencing the Beeper .................................................................................... 52  
Card Reminder............................................................................................. 52  
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings.............................................. 53  
Image Settings  
55  
2
Selecting the Card to Record or Playback....................................................... 56  
Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted ................................................ 57  
Setting the Image-recording Quality................................................................ 59  
Selecting the Image Size.............................................................................. 59  
Setting the JPEG Quality (Compression Rate) ............................................ 63  
Z: Setting the ISO Speed............................................................................ 64  
A Selecting a Picture Style ......................................................................... 66  
A Customizing a Picture Style .................................................................... 68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Contents  
A Registering a Picture Style.......................................................................70  
Setting the White Balance................................................................................72  
O Custom White Balance..............................................................................73  
P Setting the Color Temperature....................................................................78  
uWhite Balance Correction...........................................................................79  
White Balance Auto Bracketing ....................................................................80  
Auto Lighting Optimizer....................................................................................81  
Lens Peripheral Illumination Correction ...........................................................82  
Creating and Selecting a Folder.......................................................................84  
Changing the File Name ..................................................................................86  
File Numbering Methods..................................................................................88  
Setting Copyright Information...........................................................................90  
Setting the Color Space ...................................................................................92  
Setting the AF and Drive Modes  
93  
3
E: Selecting the AF Mode ..........................................................................94  
SSelecting the AF Point...........................................................................97  
When Autofocus Fails .........................................................................100  
MF: Manual Focusing ...................................................................100  
R: Selecting the Drve ...............................................................101  
j Using the Self-timer.................................................................................102  
Exposure Control  
103  
4
q Selecting the Metering Mode ...................................................................104  
d: Program AE ..............................................................................................106  
s: Shutter-Priority AE ..................................................................................108  
f: Aperture-Priority AE ...............................................................................110  
Depth-of-Field Preview ...............................................................................111  
a: Manual Exposure.....................................................................................112  
OExposure Compensation...........................................................................113  
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB).............................................................114  
AAE Lock ....................................................................................................115  
Bulb Exposures..............................................................................................116  
2 Mirror Lockup ..........................................................................................118  
DFlash Photography.....................................................................................119  
Setting the Flash ............................................................................................121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Contents  
Live View Shooting  
125  
5
zPreparing for Live View Shooting ............................................................ 126  
zLive View Shooting.................................................................................. 127  
Shooting Function Settings ........................................................................... 129  
Menu Function Settings................................................................................. 130  
Using AF to Focus......................................................................................... 131  
Focusing Manually......................................................................................... 138  
Shooting Movies  
141  
6
7
k Preparing to Shoot Movies...................................................................... 142  
k Shooting Movies...................................................................................... 143  
Autoexposure Shooting.............................................................................. 143  
Manual Exposure Shooting ........................................................................ 144  
Shooting Function Settings ........................................................................... 150  
Menu Function Settings.............................................................................. 151  
Image Playback  
155  
xImage Playback........................................................................... 156  
B Shooting Information D....................................................... 157  
xSearching for ImageQuickly ........................................................... 159  
y Display Multiple Imaes oOne Screen (Index display)....................... 159  
I Jump through Images (Jump display)................................................... 160  
u/y Magnified View.................................................................................... 161  
b Rotating the Image................................................................................... 162  
k Enjoying Movies ...................................................................................... 163  
k Playing Movies ........................................................................................ 165  
X Editing the Movie’s First and Last Scenes ............................................... 167  
Slide Show (Auto Playback) .......................................................................... 168  
Viewing the Images on TV............................................................................. 170  
JProtecting Images.................................................................................... 172  
KRecording and Playing Voice Memos ....................................................... 174  
a Copying Images ....................................................................................... 176  
LErasing Images......................................................................................... 179  
Changing Image Playback Settings............................................................... 180  
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ....................................................... 180  
Setting the Image Review Time ................................................................. 181  
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images................................................................ 182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Contents  
Sensor Cleaning  
183  
8
9
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning....................................................................184  
Appending Dust Delete Data..........................................................................185  
Manual Sensor Cleaning................................................................................187  
Printing Images  
189  
Preparing to Print ...........................................................................................190  
wPrinting......................................................................................................192  
Trimming the Image ....................................................................................197  
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)...........................................................199  
Direct Printing with DPOF ..............................................................................202  
Customizing the Camera  
203  
10  
Setting Custom Functions..............................................................................204  
Custom Functions ..........................................................................................205  
Custom Function Settings...........................................................................208  
C.Fn I: Exposure................................................................................208  
C.Fn II: Image/Flash exposure/Di......................................................214  
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive...............................................................218  
C.Fn IV: OperationOthers ...............................................................227  
Registering and Apping Custom Function Settings.....................................235  
Registering My Menu ....................................................................................237  
Saving and Loading Camera Settings............................................................238  
Registering and Applying Basic Camera Settings..........................................240  
Reference  
241  
11  
Function Availability Table .............................................................................242  
System Map ...................................................................................................244  
B Checking Camera Settings..................................................................246  
Checking the Battery Information...................................................................247  
Replacing the Date/Time Battery ...................................................................248  
Troubleshooting Guide...................................................................................249  
Error Codes....................................................................................................256  
Specifications.................................................................................................257  
Safety Warnings.............................................................................................266  
Index ..............................................................................................................270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
Index to Features  
 Image improvement features  
• Auto Lighting Optimizer Î p.81  
• Lens peripheral illumination  
Power  
 Battery  
• Charging  
• Calibration  
• Battery check  
• Battery information  
 Power outlet  
 Auto power off  
Î p.28  
correction  
Î p.82  
Î p.30  
Î p.35  
Î p.247  
Î p.33  
Î p.52  
• Noise reduction  
for long exposures  
• Noise reduction  
for high ISO speeds  
• Highlight tone priority  
Î p.214  
Î p.214  
Î p.215  
Lens  
White balance  
 Attaching/Detaching  
Î p.39  
 White balance setting  
 Custom WB  
Î p.72  
Î p.73  
Basic Settings  
(Menu Functions)  
 
Color temperature setting Î p.78  
 White alance correction Î p.79  
 Menus  
 Language  
 Date/Time  
Î p.46  
Î p.49  
Î p.49  
 WB brcketing  
Î p.80  
wfinder  
 LCD brightness adjustment Î p.18
 Doptric adjustment  
 Eyepiece shutter  
Î p.40  
Î p.117  
 Beeper  
 Release shutter  
without card  
 Clear camera settings  
Î p.52  
 
Changing the focusing screen Î p.232  
Î p.5
Î p.53  
AF  
 AF mode  
Î p.94  
Î p.97  
Recording Images  
 AF point selection  
 AF Custom Functions  
• Number of AF points  
• AF point expansion  
 Format  
 Select card  
 Recording to a card  
 Create/select a folder  
 File name  
Î p.50  
Î p.56  
Î p.57  
Î p.84  
Î p.86  
Î p.88  
Î p.223  
Î p.222  
AI Servo tracking sensitivity Î p.218  
AI Servo AF tracking method Î p.219  
Î p.218  
Vertical/Horizontal AF point Î p.226  
 File No.  
• AF Servo operation  
Image Quality  
• AF fine adjustment  
 Manual focusing  
Î p.221  
Î p.100  
 Image size  
Î p.59  
 JPEG (Compression rate) Î p.63  
 ISO speed  
• ISO speed expansion  
 Picture Style  
 Color space  
Î p.64  
Î p.208  
Î p.66  
Î p.92  
Metering  
 Metering mode  
 Multi-spot metering  
Î p.104  
Î p.105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Index to Features  
Drive  
Image playback  
 Drive modes  
 Maximum burst  
 Self-timer  
Î p.101  
Î p.62  
Î p.102  
 Image review time  
 Single image display  
 Index display  
Î p.181  
Î p.156  
Î p.159  
 Image browsing  
(Jump display)  
Shooting  
Î p.160  
Î p.161  
Î p.162  
Î p.168  
Î p.165  
 Program AE  
Î p.106  
Î p.108  
Î p.110  
Î p.112  
Î p.116  
Î p.118  
Î p.111  
 Magnified view  
 Image rotate  
 Slide show  
 Movie playback  
 Editing out movie  
first/last scene  
 Viewing the images  
on TV  
 Prtect  
 Shutter-priority AE  
 Aperture-priority AE  
 Manual exposure  
 Bulb  
 Mirror lockup  
 Depth-of-field preview  
Î p.167  
Î p.170  
Î p.172  
Î p.174  
Î p.176  
Î p.179  
Exposure adjustment  
 Ve memo  
Coping images  
 Erase  
 Exposure compensation Î p.113  
 AEB  
 AE lock  
 Safety shift  
Î p.114  
Î
Î p
Printing  
Flash  
 PictBridge  
 Print Order (DPOF)  
Î p.190  
Î p.199  
 External flash  
 Flash control  
 Flash Custom Functions Î p.124  
Î p.119  
Î p.121  
Customization  
 Custom Functions (C.Fn)Î p.204  
 Custom Function setting  
registration  
 My Menu  
 Saving camera settings Î p.238  
 Registering basic camera  
Live View shooting  
Î p.235  
Î p.237  
 Still photo shooting  
• AF  
• Manual focusing  
• Exposure simulation  
• Grid display  
Î p.126  
Î p.131  
Î p.138  
Î p.130  
Î p.130  
settings  
Î p.240  
Sensor cleaning  
Movie shooting  
 Sensor cleaning  
 Append Dust Delete Data Î p.185  
Î p.184  
 Movie shooting  
Î p.142  
• Autoexposure shooting Î p.143  
Manual exposure shooting Î p.144  
• Recording size Î p.151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
Handling Precautions  
Camera Care  
  This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical  
shock.  
  The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you  
accidentally drop the camera into water, promptly consult your nearest  
Canon Service Center. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry cloth. If the  
camera has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a well-wrung wet cloth.  
  Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such  
as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near  
anything emitting strong radio waves such as a large antenna. Strong  
magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.  
  Do not leave the camera in excessive heat such as in a car in direct sunlight.  
High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.  
  The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to  
disassemble the camera yourself.  
  Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and  
focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contan organic solvents to clean  
the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, takhe camera to the nearest  
Canon Service Center.  
  Do not touch the camera’s electrconcts with your fingers. This is to  
prevent the contacts from corrodrroded contacts can cause camera  
misoperation.  
  If the camera is suddenly rougt in from the cold into a warm room,  
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent  
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to  
the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.  
  If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid  
damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and  
battery from the camera, and wait until the condensation has evaporated  
before using the camera.  
  If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery  
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the  
camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to  
check that the camera is still working.  
  Avoid storing the camera where there are corrosive chemicals such as a  
darkroom or chemical lab.  
  If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions  
before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is  
an important shoot coming up, have the camera checked by your Canon  
dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Handling Precautions  
LCD Panel and LCD Monitor  
  Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision  
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there might be a few dead  
pixels among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels. Dead pixels displaying  
only black or red, etc., are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images  
recorded.  
  If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur  
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only  
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.  
  In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow or it  
might look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.  
Cards  
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:  
  Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,  
physical shock, or vibration.  
  Do not store or use the card near anything having a strong magnetic field  
such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet. Asavoid places prone to having  
static electricity.  
  Do not leave the card in direct unligr near a heat source.  
  Store the card in a case.  
  Do not store the card in hot, dr humid locations.  
Lens  
After detaching the lens from the camera, attach the  
lens caps or put down the lens with the rear end up to  
avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical  
contacts.  
Contacts  
Cautions During Prolonged Use  
If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or movie shooting for a  
prolonged period, the camera may become hot. Although this is not a  
malfunction, holding the hot camera for a long period can cause slight skin  
burns.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
Quick Start Guide  
Install the battery. (p.32)  
1
Take off the cap and insert a fully-  
charged battery. To charge the battery,  
see page 28.  
Attach the lens. (p.39)  
Align it with the red dot.  
2
3
4
5
Set the lenfocus mode switch  
to <A. (p.9)  
Insert the card. (p.36)  
The left slot is for a CF card, and the  
right slot is for an SD card.  
Set the power switch to <1>.  
(p.34)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
Quick Start Guide  
Set the camera to the default  
settings. (p.53)  
6
7
On the menu screen under the [  
7] tab,  
select [Clear all camera settings].  
• Press the <M> button and turn  
the <6> or <5> dial to select it,  
then press <0>.  
• The <d> Program AE mode will take  
effect.  
Focus the subject. (p.41)  
Aim the Area AF frame over the  
subject. Press the shutter button  
halfway, ad the camera will focus the  
subjct.  
Take the picture. (p.41)  
Press the shutter button completely to  
take the picture.  
8
9
View the image. (p.181)  
The captured image will be displayed  
for approx. 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.  
To display the image again, press the  
<x> button (p.156).  
  Shooting will be possible with either a CF card or SD card in the  
camera.  
  To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.156).  
  To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.179).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
Nomenclature  
Lens mount index  
(p.39)  
Mirror (p.118,187)  
Movie microphone  
(p.143)  
Self-timer lamp  
(p.102)  
Shutter button  
(p.41)  
Lens lock pin  
Lens release  
button (p.39)  
Grip  
Lens  
mount  
Depth-of-field  
preview button  
(p.111)  
Contacts (p.13)  
Vertical-grip on/off  
switch (p.43)  
Tripod socket  
Body number  
<I> Vertical-grip  
FE lock/Multi-spot metering/  
Movie shooting button  
(p.43,119/105/143)  
Vertical-grip Main Dial  
(p.43,42)  
Hand strap E1 mount  
(p.26)  
Vertical-grip shutter button  
(p.43,41)  
Body cap (p.39)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
Nomenclature  
<O> Exposure compensation/  
Aperture button (p.113/112)  
<Z> ISO speed  
setting button (p.64,144)  
<U> LCD panel illumination  
button (p.116)  
<I> FE lock/  
Multi-spot metering/  
Movie shooting button  
(p.119/105/143)  
Hot shoe  
Flash-sync contacts  
<6> Main Dial  
(p.42)  
Eyecup  
(p.40)  
Strap mount  
(p.26)  
<0> Setting/  
Live View shooting  
button (p.44/126)  
LCD monitor  
(p.44,180)  
<5> Quick  
Control Dial (p.43)  
<9> Multi-controller  
(p.42)  
<A/y> Vertical-grip  
AE lock/Reduce button  
(p.43,115/161,197)  
Power/Quick Control Dial  
switch (p.34)  
<p> Vertical-grip  
AF start button  
(p.43,41,95,96,127,153)  
<S/u> Vertical-grip  
AF point selection/  
Magnify button  
(p.43,97/161,197)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
Nomenclature  
<Q> Metering mode  
selection/Flash exposure  
compensation button  
(p.104/119)  
<V> Focal plane mark  
Top LCD panel (p.21)  
<p>  
AF start button  
(p.41,95,96,127,153)  
<W> Shooting  
mode selection button  
(p.106,127,143,144)  
<A/y> AE lock/  
Reduce button  
(p.115/161,197)  
<o>  
AF mode selection/  
Drive mode selection  
button (p.94/101)  
<S/u>  
AF point selection/  
Magnify button  
(p.97/161,197)  
<Y> AEB setting  
button (p.114)  
Wireless File  
Transmitter  
mounting hole  
Eyepiece  
shutter lever  
(p.117)  
Speaker (p.165,175)  
Viewfinder eyepiece  
Dioptric adjustment knob (p.40)  
Battery release  
handle (p.32,33)  
Battery (p.28)  
System extension  
terminal  
If you use Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E2/E2A connected to the system  
extension terminal, update the WFT-E2/E2A’s firmware to Version 2.0.0 or  
higher.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18  
Nomenclature  
<M> Menu  
button (p.44)  
<B> Info/Trimming  
orientation button  
(p.128,148,156,246/197)  
CF card slot  
(p.36)  
Strap mount  
(p.26)  
SD card slot  
(p.36)  
Card slot cover  
(p.36)  
Terminal  
cover  
CF card eject  
button (p.38)  
<x>  
Playback  
button  
(p.156)  
Access lamp  
(p.38)  
Card slot cover  
release handle (p.36)  
Rear LCD panel  
(p.22)  
Voice memo microphone (p.174)  
<L> Erase button  
(p.179)  
<H> Protect/Voice memo button  
(p.172/174)/  
<A> Picture Style selection button (p.66)  
<B> Function button (p.56,59,72,78)  
<D> PC terminal (p.120)  
<F> Remote control terminal (N3 type) (p.117)  
<Y> External microphone IN terminal (p.152)  
<q/C>  
Audio/video OUT/  
Digital terminal (p.170/190)  
Battery compartment  
cap (p.32)  
<Z> HDMI mini OUT terminal (p.171)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
Nomenclature  
Viewfinder Information  
Center spot metering circle  
Focusing screen  
Area AF frame  
AF point  
: Cross-type  
AF points  
: AF points  
Exposure  
level indicator  
Max. burst  
<i> ISO speed  
<p>  
JPEG icon  
icon  
<1>  
RAW icon  
<q> Metering mode  
<q> Manual exposure  
<z> Battery check  
<w> AE lock  
<o> Focus confirmation light  
AEB in-progress  
Multi-spot metering  
ISO speed  
<H> Highlight tone priority  
<D> Flash-ready  
Improper FE lock warnin
Shots remaining  
Recording media full (Full)  
<e> High-speed sync  
(FP flash)  
<r> FE lock  
Standard exposure index  
FEB in-progress  
Exposure level scale  
: 1 stop  
: 1/3 stop  
AF point selection mode  
- -  
(
AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)  
Recording media indicator (Card *)  
[
]
- -  
Overexposure  
AF point registration  
- -  
Flash  
overexposure  
( [ ] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP)  
- -  
Shutter speed  
Bulb (buLb)  
FE lock  
Exposure level  
Busy (buSY)  
Flash exposure  
level  
Aperture  
<y> Exposure compensation  
Flash exposure compensation  
Flash underexposure  
Underexposure  
<u> White balance correction  
The display will show only the settings currently applied.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
Nomenclature  
Top LCD Panel  
Shutter speed  
Bulb (buLb)  
Aperture  
AEB amount  
Bulb exposure time (min.:sec.)  
FE lock (FEL)  
Busy (buSY)  
Error (Err)  
Sensor cleaning (CLn)  
Dust Delete Data acquisition (--  
)
AF point selection mode  
- -  
( [ ] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)  
- -  
Recording media indicator (Card *)  
AF point registration  
- -  
( [ ] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP)  
ISO speed  
Dust Delete Data acquisition  
- -  
(----)  
Shots remaining  
Self-timer countdown  
Bulb exposure time (Hours)  
Recording media full (Full)  
Error code  
Shooting mode  
: Program AE  
f : Aperture-priority AE  
: Manual exposure  
d
a
Remaining images to record  
s : Shutter-priority AE  
AF mode  
X:  
ISO speed  
One-Shot AF  
Z:  
AI Servo AF  
Highlight  
tone priority  
Metering mode  
q Evaluative  
metering  
w Partial metering  
r Spot metering  
e Center-weighted  
average metering  
Exposure level  
scale  
Drive mode  
u
Single shooting  
o High-speed  
continuous shooting  
p Low-speed  
continuous shooting  
Battery check  
zxcm  
bn  
Flash exposure compensation  
k
l
6
10-sec. self-timer  
2-sec. self-timer  
Silent single shooting  
AEB  
Mirror lockup  
Exposure level indicator  
Exposure compensation amount  
AEB range  
Flash exposure compensation amount  
The display will show only the settings currently applied.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
Nomenclature  
Rear LCD Panel  
External media selection  
icon*3  
External media connection icon*3  
White balance correction  
SD card indicator  
Monochrome shooting  
White balance  
Q Auto  
SD card  
selection icon  
W
Daylight  
E Shade  
R
Y
U
I
O
P
Cloudy  
CF card  
indicator  
Tungsten light  
White fluorescent light  
Flash  
Custom  
Color temperature  
CF card  
selection  
icon  
Custom white balance  
acquisition display ([ * ])  
Image size  
3
Large  
4
5
6
Medium1  
Medium2  
Small  
File No.  
Custom white balance  
number  
Color temperature  
Personal white balance  
number  
1
RAW  
K1 Medium RAW  
61 Small RAW  
Wired LAN connection*1  
Folder number  
Recording media indicator  
(Full, Err)  
Wireless LAN connection*1  
Data transfer icon*2  
*1: Displayed when Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E2 II A/B/C/D or WFT-E2/E2A is used.  
*2: Displayed when the camera is connected to a personal computer or a printer  
(PictBridge).  
*3: Displayed when the WFT-E2 II A/B/C/D or WFT-E2/E2A and external media are used.  
The display will show only the settings currently applied.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
Nomenclature  
Shooting Settings Display  
Aperture  
<A> AE lock  
<D> Flash-ready  
ISO speed  
Shutter speed  
BULB: Bulb  
Shooting mode  
: Program AE  
<e> High-speed sync  
(FP flash)  
<r> FE lock/  
FEB in-progress  
d
f: Aperture-priority  
AE  
a : Manual exposure  
s : Shutter-priority  
AE  
Exposure level  
indicator  
<H> Highlight  
tone priority  
Metering mode  
q Evaluative  
metering  
<y> Flash exposure  
compensation  
w Partial metering  
r Spot metering  
e Center-weighted  
average metering  
Shots remaining  
<o> Focus confirmation  
light  
Drive mode  
u
Single shooting  
o High-speed  
continuous shooting  
p Low-speed  
continuous shooting  
AF mode  
X: One-Shot AF  
Z: AI Servo AF  
ISO speed  
k
l
6
10-sec. self-timer  
2-sec. self-timer  
Silent single shooting  
Picture Style  
P Standard  
Q Portrait  
R Landscape  
S Neutral  
U Faithful  
Battery check  
zxcm  
bn  
V Monochrome  
W User Def. 1-3  
<2> Mirror lockup  
<Y> AEB  
Max. burst  
The display will show only the settings currently applied.  
  By default, when the power is turned on, pressing the <B> button  
while nothing is displayed on the LCD monitor will display the shooting  
settings screen. To turn off the display, press the button again.  
  Regarding the shooting settings display, see [8C.Fn II -10: INFO.  
button when shooting] on page 217.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23  
Nomenclature  
Battery Pack LP-E4  
Lock lever  
Contacts  
Battery release handle  
Protective cover  
Handle end  
Contact end  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24  
Nomenclature  
Battery Charger LC-E4  
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E4 (p.28).  
Charge level/  
Calibration (Discharge) status indicator/  
Performance check lamp  
Charge lamp  
Calibration/Performance  
check button  
Battery pack  
slot  
Car battery cable socket  
Power cord socket  
Protective  
covers (2)  
Power cord  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
Nomenclature  
Attaching the Neck Strap and Hand Strap E1  
Using the Cable Protector  
Strap  
Cable Protector  
Interface cable  
HDMcable (Sold separately)  
Sstem extension terminal  
Hand strap E1 (Sold seprately)  
1
2
3
Attaching the Neck Strap  
4
6
5
After attaching the strap, pull it at the buckle to take up the slack and to  
make sure it does not loosen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
Getting Started  
This chapter explains preliminarstepand basic  
camera operations.  
Minimizing Dust  
  When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.  
  When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to  
attach the body cap to the camera.  
  Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
Charging the Battery  
Connect the charger to a power  
outlet.  
  Connect the power plug to a power  
outlet, and connect the power cord to  
the charger.  
1
  When no battery is attached, all the  
indicator lamps will be off.  
Remove the protective covers  
2 from the charger and battery.  
  Remove the protective cover on the  
charger by sliding it out.  
Recharge the battery.  
3
  Slide the battery into the charger’s  
slot as shown by the arrow, and make  
sure it is securely attached.  
 
You can attach the battery to slot A or B.  
X The battery will start recharging and  
the green status lamp will blink.  
X When the battery is fully charged, all  
three Charge level indicators will light  
(50%/80%/100%).  
 
It takes approx. 2 hours to fully recharge  
a completely exhausted battery.  
The time required to recharge the battery  
depends on the ambient temperature  
and battery’s charge level.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
Charging the Battery  
Tips for Using the Battery and Charger  
 
Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.  
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually discharge and  
lose its power.  
  After recharging the battery, detach it and unplug the power  
cord from the power outlet.  
When not using the battery and charger, attach the protective covers.  
  Use the battery in an ambient temperature range of 0°C - 45°C /  
32°F - 113°F.  
To attain best battery performance, an ambient temperature of 10°C -  
30°C / 50°F - 86°F is recommended. In cold locations such as snowy  
areas, battery performance and operation time may temporarily decrease.  
  When not using the camera, remove he battery.  
If the battery is left in the camera for a olonged period, a small  
amount of power current is relea, resulting in excess discharge  
and shorter battery life. Tat te battery from the camera and  
attach the protective cover e storing. Storing the battery after it  
is fully charged can ower the battery’s performance.  
  The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.  
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz  
power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available plug adapter for  
the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage  
transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can damage the battery charger.  
  Check the battery performance.  
While the battery is recharging, press the  
<PERFORMANCE> button to check the battery’s  
performance level indicated by the Charge level indicator.  
(Green) : Battery performance is fine.  
(Green) : Battery’s recharge performance is slightly degraded.  
(Red) : Purchasing a new battery is recommended.  
  If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully  
charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.  
Check the battery’s recharge performance (p.247) and purchase a new battery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
Charging the Battery  
Use the Car’s Cigarette Lighter Socket to Recharge the Battery  
With Car Battery Cable CB-570 (sold separately), you can connect the  
charger’s car battery cable socket (<DC IN> terminal) to your car’s  
cigarette lighter socket.  
  When recharging the battery this way, be sure that the car’s engine  
is running. If the car engine is off, disconnect the car battery cable  
from the cigarette lighter socket. If you leave the car battery cable  
connected to the cigarette lighter socket, it may drain the car battery.  
  Do not use a transformer for the car with the battery charger.  
  Battery charging from a car battery is possible only with a 12 V DC  
or 24 V DC car battery in a minus-grounded car. The shape or  
dimensions of the cigarette lighter socket in certain cars might not be  
compatible with the car battery cable.  
The <CAL/CHARGE> Lamp nks n Red  
 
This indicates that you should brathe battery so that the correct  
battery level is detected and tmera’s battery level indicator can  
display the correct battry level. Calibration is not a required  
operation. If you want to just echarge the battery, you can let the  
battery start recharging automatically after approx. 10 sec. If you  
want to do the calibration, press the <CALIBRATE> button while the  
<CAL/CHARGE> lamp is blinking in red. The Charge level indicator  
will blink in red and the calibration (power discharge) will start.  
After the calibration is completed, the battery will start recharging  
automatically. Note that the less depleted the battery, the longer the  
calibration will take. The <2h>, <4h>, and <10h> figures on the side of  
the Charge level indicator respectively indicate the approximate number  
of hours it will take to complete the calibration (power discharge). If the  
 
<10h> indicator blinks in red, it will take approx. 10 hours.  
  After the calibration is completed and the battery is totally drained, it  
will take a further 2 hours to recharge the battery fully. If you want to  
stop the calibration before it is completed and start recharging the  
battery, remove the battery from the charger and attach it again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
Charging the Battery  
All Three Charge Level Indicators Blink  
  If all three Charge level indicators blink in green, it means that the  
battery’s internal temperature is not within 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F.  
The battery will start recharging when the internal temperature is  
within 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F.  
  If all the Calibration (discharge) status indicators blink in red or if all  
the lamps blink in red and green (including the <CAL/CHARGE>  
lamp), remove the battery from the charger and take it to your dealer  
or to nearest Canon Service Center.  
  Also, if a battery other than Battery Pack LP-E4 is attached to the  
charger, the lamps will blink in red and green (including the <CAL/  
CHARGE> lamp) and the battery cannot be recharged.  
  The charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP-E4.  
  Battery Pack LP-E4 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with a  
non-Canon battery charger or product may result in malfunction or  
accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.  
 
When two battery packs are attached to the charger, the battery attached  
first will be charged first, then the other battery will be charged.  
Although one battery can be recharged and another calibrated at the same  
time, two batteries cannot be recharged or calibrated at the same time.  
  For battery calibration, it is best to do it after the battery is nearly  
exhausted. If you do the calibration with a fully charged battery, it will  
take approx. 12 hours to complete the calibration and the battery  
recharging (approx. 10 hours to discharge, and approx. 2 hours to fully  
recharge).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
Installing and Removing the Battery  
Installing the Battery  
Insert a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E4 into the camera.  
Remove the battery compartment  
cap.  
1
Insert the battery.  
2
  Insert the battery firmly all the way,  
and turn the release handle as shown  
by the arrow.  
Removing the Battery  
Flt the battery release  
handle and turn it as shown by  
the arrow.  
1
Pull out the battery.  
2
  To prevent shorting, be sure to attach  
the protective cover (p.24) to the  
battery.  
  When not using the camera, attach  
the battery compartment cap (p.19).  
If the battery’s rubber lining (to repel water) is not clean, use  
a moist cotton swab to wipe it clean.  
Rubber lining  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
Using a Household Power Outlet (Sold separately)  
With AC Adapter Kit ACK-E4 (sold separately), you can connect the  
camera to a household power outlet and not worry about the battery  
level.  
Connect the DC Coupler’s plug.  
1
  Connect the DC Coupler’s plug to the  
AC adapter’s DC terminal.  
Connect the power cord.  
2
  Connect the power plug to the power  
outlet, then connect the power cord to  
the AC adapter.  
sethe DC Coupler.  
3
sert the DC Coupler firmly all the  
way, and turn the release handle as  
shown by the arrow.  
  After using the camera, unplug the  
power plug from the power outlet.  
  The DC Coupler is not water-resistant, so do not get it wet when using it  
outdoors.  
  Do not connect or disconnect the power cord or DC Coupler while the  
camera’s power switch is set to <1> or <J>.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
Turning on the Power  
Power/Quick Control Dial Switch  
<2> : The camera is turned off and  
does not operate. Set to this  
position when not using the  
camera.  
<1> : The camera turns on.  
<J>  
: The camera and <5> operate  
(p.43).  
About the Automatic Self-Cleaning Sensor  
 
Whenever you set the power switch to  
1/J> or < >, the sensor  
<
2
cleaning will be executed automatically.  
During the snsor cleaning, the LCD  
monill diplay <f>.  
  n uring the sensor cleaning, you  
till shoot by pressing the shutter  
button halfway (p.41) to stop the  
sensor cleaning and take a picture.  
 
If you turn on/off the power switch  
1/J>/< > at a short interval,  
the < > icon might not be displayed.  
This is normal and not a problem.  
<
2
f
About Auto Power Off  
  To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after  
approx. 1 minute of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just  
press the shutter button halfway (p.41).  
  You can change the auto power-off time with the menu’s [5 Auto  
power off] setting (p.52).  
If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to  
the card, [Recording ...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after  
the card finishes recording the image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34  
Turning on the Power  
Checking the Battery Level  
When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be  
indicated in one of six levels:  
Level  
(%)  
Icon  
z
x
c
m
b
n
Indication  
100 - 70 Sufficient battery level  
69 - 50 Battery level exceeds 50%  
49 - 20 Battery level below 50%  
19 - 10 Battery level is low  
9 - 1  
0
Battery will be exhausted soon  
Recharge the battery  
Battery Life  
Temperature  
Possible shots  
At 23°C
Approx. 1500  
At 0°C / 32°F  
Approx. 1200  
 
The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E4, no Live View  
shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.  
  The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following  
operations:  
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.  
• Often activating only the AF without taking a picture.  
• Using the LCD monitor often.  
• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.  
  The actual number of shots may be fewer than indicated above  
depending on the shooting conditions.  
  The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on  
the lens used, the number of possible shots may be lower.  
  For battery life with Live View shooting, see page 129.  
  See the [6 Battery info.] menu to further check the battery’s condition  
(p.247).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
Installing and Removing the Card  
The camera can use a CF card and SD card. Images can be recorded  
when at least one card is installed in the camera.  
If both card slots have a card, you can select which card to record  
images with or record the same images simultaneously on both cards  
(p.56, 57).  
If you use an SD card, be sure the card’s write protect switch  
is set upward to enable writing/erasing.  
Installing the Card  
Open the cover.  
  Flip out and turn the cover release  
1
handle as shown by the arrow.  
Insert card.  
  leslot is for a CF card, and the  
slot is for an SD card.  
  As shown in the illustration, face  
the CF card’s label side toward you  
and insert the end with the small  
holes into the camera.  
2
If the card is inserted in the wrong  
way, it may damage the camera.  
X The CF card eject button will stick  
out.  
  With the SD card’s label facing you,  
Write protect switch  
push in the card until it clicks in place.  
Close the cover.  
  Press the cover until it snaps shut.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36  
Installing and Removing the Card  
Set the power switch to <1>.  
Shots remaining  
4
X The number of remaining shots will  
be displayed on the top LCD panel  
and in the viewfinder.  
X The rear LCD panel will indicate  
which card(s) has been installed. The  
images will be recorded to the card  
with the < > arrow next to the  
respective card’s indicator.  
Card selection icon  
CF card indicator  
SD card indicator  
  SDHC memory cards can be used with the camera.  
  Although the thickness is different between the two types of  
CF (CompactFlash) cards, either one can be inserted into the  
camera.  
  Ultra DMA (UDMA) CF cards and hard disk-type cards can also be used  
with the camera. UDMA CF cards enable faster data writing.  
  The number of possible shots varies depending on the card’s capacity,  
image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.  
  Setting the [2 Release shutter without card] menu option to [Disable]  
will prevent you from forgetting to install a card (p.52).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37  
Installing and Removing the Card  
Removing the Card  
Open the cover.  
1
  Set the power switch to <2>.  
  Make sure the access lamp is off,  
then open the cover.  
Remove the card.  
  To remove the CF card, push the  
eject button.  
2
  To remove the SD card, push it in  
gently and release it. Then pull it out.  
  Close the cover.  
  The access lamp lights or blinks while dais being transferred to  
the card and when data is being recordeead, or erased on the  
card. While the access lamp is lit nkin, never do any of the  
following. Doing so may dae thimage data. It may also  
damage the card or camera
• Opening the card slt cover
• Removing the batter.  
• Shaking or banging the camera around.  
  If the card already contains recorded images, the image number might  
not start from 0001 (p.88).  
  If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove  
and reinstall the card. If the error persists, use a different card.  
If you can transfer all the images in the card to a computer, transfer all  
the images and then format the card with the camera (p.50). The card  
may then return to normal.  
  When holding a hard disk-type card, always hold its sides. You may  
damage the card by holding its flat surfaces. Hard disk-type cards are  
more vulnerable to vibration and physical shock. If you use such a card,  
be careful not to subject the camera to vibration or physical shock  
especially while recording or displaying images.  
  Do not touch the SD card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects.  
Even with the power switch set to <2>, when you insert or remove a  
card, the access lamp might blink.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38  
Attaching and Detaching a Lens  
Attaching a Lens  
Remove the caps.  
  Remove the rear lens cap and the  
1
body cap by turning them as shown  
by the arrow.  
Attach the lens.  
2
  Align the red dots on the lens and  
camera and turn the lens as shown  
by the arrow until it clicks in place.  
On the lens, set the focus mode  
3 switto <f> (autofocus).  
If is set to <g> (manual focus),  
utofocus will not operate.  
Remove the front lens cap.  
4
Detaching the Lens  
While pressing the lens release  
button, turn the lens as shown by  
the arrow.  
  Turn the lens until it stops, then  
detach it.  
  Attach the rear lens cap to the  
detached lens.  
  Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause  
loss of vision.  
  The camera cannot be used with EF-S lenses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
39  
Basic Operation  
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity  
Remove the eyecup.  
  While grasping both sides of the  
1
eyecup, slide it upward to remove.  
Make the adjustment.  
2
  Turn the knob to the right or left until  
the AF points or the center spot  
metering circle (p.20) looks sharp in  
the viewfinder.  
  Attach the eyecup.  
If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still caot proide a sharp viewfinder  
image, using Dioptric Adjustment Lens Eld separately) is recommended.  
Holding the Camera  
To obtain sharp images, hold the  
camera still to minimize camera  
shake.  
Horizontal  
shooting  
Vertical  
shooting  
1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.  
2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.  
3. Press the shutter button lightly with your right hand’s index finger.  
4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.  
5. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.  
6. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot in front of the other.  
For shooting while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 125.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40  
Basic Operation  
Shutter Button  
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button  
halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.  
Pressing halfway  
This activates autofocusing and  
automatic exposure metering that sets  
the shutter speed and aperture.  
The exposure setting (shutter speed and  
aperture) is displayed on the top LCD  
panel and in the viewfinder (9).  
Pressing completely  
This releases the shutter and takes the  
picture.  
Preventing Camera Sake  
Camera movement during the moment of exposure is called camera  
shake. Camera shake can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera  
shake, note the following:  
• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the previous page.  
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then press the  
shutter button completely.  
  Pressing the <p> button will be the same as pressing the shutter  
button halfway.  
  If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first  
or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely  
immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.  
  Even during the menu display, image playback, and image recording,  
you can instantly go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter  
button halfway.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41  
Basic Operation  
6Making Selections with the Main Dial  
(1)  
After pressing a button, turn the  
<6> dial.  
When you press a button, its function  
remains selected for 6 seconds (9).  
During this time, you can turn the <6>  
dial to set the desired setting. When the  
function selection turns off or if you press  
the shutter button halfway, the camera  
will be ready to shoot.  
  Use the dial to select or set the  
shooting mode, AF mode, metering  
mode, AF pint, ISO speed, Picture  
Style, expore compensation when  
the <buttn is pressed, card, etc.  
(2)  
Te <6> dial only.  
While looking at the viewfinder or top LCD panel,  
turn the <6> dial to set the desired setting.  
  Use this dial to set the shutter speed,  
aperture, etc.  
9 Operating the Multi-controller  
The <9> consists of an eight-direction  
key and a button at the center.  
 
Use it to select the AF point, correct  
the white balance, move the AF frame  
or the magnifying frame during Live  
View shooting, or scroll over the  
image during magnified view.  
You can use <9> to set menu options (except [3 Erase images] and [5  
Format]) (p.45).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
Basic Operation  
5Making Selections with the Quick Control Dial  
Before using the <5> dial, set the power switch to <J>.  
(1)  
After pressing a button, turn the  
<5> dial.  
When you press a button, its function remains  
selected for 6 seconds (9). During this  
time, you can turn the <5> dial to set the  
desired setting. When the function selection  
turns off or if you press the shutter button  
halfway, the camera will be ready to shoot.  
 
Use the dial to select or set the shooting mode,  
drive mode, flash exposure compensation, AF  
point, ISO peed, Picture Style, exposure  
cnsatin when the <  
O> button is  
preed, image size, white balance, etc.  
(2)  
the <5> dial only.  
While looking at the viewfinder or top LCD panel,  
turn the <  
5> dial to set the desired setting.  
 
Use this dial to set the exposure  
compensation amount, aperture setting for  
manual exposures, selecting an AF point, etc.  
You can do step (1) even when the power switch is set to <1>.  
Vertical Shooting  
The camera bottom has vertical-grip buttons and a dial (p.16, 17).  
 
Before using the vertical grip’s buttons and dial,  
set the vertical-grip ON/OFF switch to < >.  
1
  When not using the vertical shooting  
controls, set the switch to <2> to  
prevent accidental operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43  
Menu Operations  
You can set various settings with the menus such as the beeper, date/  
time, etc. While looking at the LCD monitor, use the <M> button  
on the camera back and the <6> <5> dials.  
<M> button  
LCD monitor  
<6> Main Dial  
<5>  
Quick Control Dial  
<0> button  
5 Setup 1  
6 et-up 2  
7 Set-up 3  
4 Playback 2  
3 Playback 1  
2 Shooting 2  
8 Custom Functions  
9 My Menu  
1 Shooting 1  
Tab  
Menu settings  
Menu items  
Icon  
Color  
Red  
Category  
Description  
1/2  
3/4  
Shooting menu Shooting-related items  
Playback menu Image playback-related items  
Blue  
5/6/7 Yellow Set-up menu  
Camera’s function settings  
8
Orange Camera’s Custom Functions  
Register frequently-used menu options and Custom  
Functions  
Green  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44  
Menu Operations  
Menu Setting Procedure  
Display the menu.  
  Press the <M> button to display  
1
the menu.  
Select a tab.  
  Turn the <6> dial to select a tab.  
2
3
Select the desired item.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the item,  
then press <0>.  
lecthe setting.  
urn the <5> dial to select the  
desired setting.  
4
  The current setting is indicated in  
blue.  
Set the selected setting.  
  Press <0> to set it.  
5
6
Exit the menu.  
  Press the <M> button to exit the  
menu and return to camera shooting  
ready.  
  The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have  
pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.  
  You can use <9> to set menu options (except [3 Erase images] and  
[5 Format]).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
Menu Settings  
1 Shooting 1 (Red)  
White balance  
Page  
72  
Q / W / E / R / Y / U / I / O (1 - 5) /  
P (2500 - 10000) / PC-1 - 5  
Custom WB registration Manual registration of white balance data  
73  
WB correction: B/A/M/G bias, 9 levels each  
WB-BKT: B/A and M/G bias, single-level  
increments, ±3 levels  
79  
80  
WB SHIFT/BKT  
Color space  
sRGB / Adobe RGB  
92  
PStandard / QPortrait / RLandscape /  
Picture Style  
SNeutral / UFaithful / VMonochrome / 66-71  
WUser Def. 1, 2, 3  
Peripheralillumination  
correction  
Enable / Disable  
82  
2 Shooting 2 (Red)  
JPEG quality  
Compression rate for 3, 5, 6  
1 / K1 / 61  
63  
59  
Image size  
(p.48  
)
3 / 4 / 5
Review time  
Beep  
Off / 2 sec. / 4 . / 8 sec. / Hold  
On / Of  
181  
52  
Release shutter  
without card  
Enable / Disable  
52  
Obtain data to be used by provided software to  
delete dust spots  
Dust Delete Data  
185  
121  
External Speedlite  
control  
Flash function settings / Flash C.Fn settings /  
Clear all Speedlite C.Fn’s  
3 Playback 1 (Blue)  
Protect images  
Rotate  
Erase-protect images  
172  
162  
179  
199  
176  
Rotate vertical images  
Erase images  
Print order  
Erase images  
Specify images to be printed (DPOF)  
Copy images between cards  
Image copy  
External media  
backup  
Displayed when external media is used via WFT-E2  
II A/B/C/D or WFT-E2/E2A (both sold separately)  
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46  
Menu Settings  
4 Playback 2 (Blue)  
Highlight alert  
Page  
157  
158  
158  
Disable / Enable  
Disable / Enable  
Brightness / RGB  
AF point display  
Histogram  
Enlarge from image center / Enlarge from  
selected AF point  
Enlarge display  
Image jump w/6  
Slide show  
161  
1 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date / Folder  
/ Movies / Stills  
160  
168  
Select the images and set the Play time and  
Repeat settings for automatic playback  
5 Set-up 1 (Yellow)  
1min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. / 30 min.  
/ Off  
Auto power off  
52  
57  
[Record func.] Standa/ Auto switch media /  
c. seprately / Rec. to multiple  
[Record/play] backf / g / u  
[Foldertinand selecting a folder  
Record func+media/  
folder sel.  
56  
84  
File numbering  
Continuouto reset / Manual reset  
88  
86  
Fe nae (unique setting) / User setting 1 / User  
setting 2  
File name setting  
Auto rotate  
Format  
OnzD / OnD / Off  
182  
50  
Initialize and erase data in the card  
6 Set-up 2 (Yellow)  
LCD brightness  
Adjustable to one of seven brightness levels  
180  
49  
Set the date (year, month, day) and time (hour,  
min., sec.)  
Date/Time  
LanguageK  
Language selectable  
NTSC / PAL  
49  
Video system  
170  
Type, remaining capacity, shutter count,  
recharge performance check  
Battery info.  
247  
126  
130  
142  
151  
LV z/k setting / AF mode / Grid display /  
Exposure simulation / Metering timer / Movie  
Live View/Movie func.  
set.  
recording size / Sound recording  
(p.48  
)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
Menu Settings  
7 Set-up 3 (Yellow)  
Page  
238  
Save/load settings on  
media  
Save/load camera settings to/from the card  
Regist/apply basic  
settings  
The camera’s basic settings are registered in  
and applied to the camera  
240  
53  
Clear all camera  
settings  
Resets the camera to the default settings  
Copyright  
information  
Display copyright information / Enter author’s name /  
Enter copyright details / Delete copyright information  
90  
Sensor cleaning  
Firmware Ver.  
Auto cleaning / Clean now / Clean manually  
For updating the firmware  
184  
-
Displayed when external media is used via WFT-E2  
II A/B/C/D or WFT-E2/E2A (both sold separately)  
WFT settings  
-
8 Custom Functions (Orange)  
C.Fn I: Exposure  
208  
214  
C.Fn II: Image/Flash  
exposure/Display  
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive  
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others  
Customize fuctions as desired  
218  
227  
Clear all Custom  
Functions (C.Fn)  
Clears all Custom Function settings  
204  
235  
C.Fn setting register/ Custom Function settings are registered in and  
apply  
applied to the camera  
9 My Menu (Green)  
Register frequently-used menu items and  
Custom Functions  
My Menu settings  
237  
  What is displayed in [2 Image size] depends on the [Record func.]  
(p.57) setting under [5 Record func+media/folder sel.]. If [Record  
func.] is set to [Rec. separately], select the image size for the respective  
card.  
  What is displayed for [LV z/k set.] depends on the [6 Live View/  
Movie func. set.] setting. Also, what is displayed (frame rate) for [Movie  
rec. size] depends on the [6 Video system] setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48  
Before You Start  
3Setting the Interface Language  
Select [LanguageK].  
1
  Under the [6] tab, select  
[LanguageK] (the third item from  
the top), then press <0>.  
Set the desired language.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
language, then press <0>.  
2
X The interface language will change.  
3Setting the Date and Time  
Check if the camera’s date and time e set correctly. If necessary, set  
the correct date and time.  
Select [Date/Time].  
1
  Under the [6] tab, select [Date/  
Time], then press <0>.  
Set the date, time and date display format.  
2
 
Turn the <5  
> dial to select the number.  
is displayed.  
  Press <0> so  
 
Turn the <  
setting, then press <  
5
> dial to select the desired  
>. (Returns to  
0
.)  
Exit the setting.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],  
then press <0>.  
3
X The date/time will be set and the  
menu will reappear.  
It is important to set the correct date/time because it will be recorded  
together with each captured image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
Before You Start  
3Formatting the Card  
If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or  
personal computer, formatting the card with the camera is recommended.  
When the card is formatted, all images and data in the card will  
be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make  
sure there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer  
the images to a personal computer, etc., before formatting the  
card.  
Select [Format].  
  Under the [5] tab, select [Format],  
1
then press <0>.  
St te card.  
  s the CF card, and [g] is the SD  
2
card.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the card,  
then press <0>.  
Select [OK].  
  When [g] is selected, low-level  
formatting is possible (p.51).  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],  
then press <0>.  
3
X The card will be formatted.  
X When the formatting is completed,  
the menu will reappear.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50  
Before You Start  
When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management  
information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be aware  
of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the card,  
execute low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to prevent the  
data from being leaked.  
The card capacity displayed on the card format screen might be smaller  
than the capacity indicated on the card.  
About Low-level Formatting  
When [g] is selected, low-level formatting is possible. If the writing  
speed to the SD card is slower than usual or if you want to completely  
erase the data in the SD card, checkmark Low level format] and  
format the card.  
Preshe <L> button.  
n sep 3 on the preceding page,  
ress the <L> button.  
X The [Low level format] option will be  
checkmarked <X>.  
  With <X> displayed, select [OK] to  
start the low-level formatting.  
  Since low-level formatting will erase all recordable sectors in the SD  
card, the formatting will take longer than normal formatting.  
  You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in this  
case, normal formatting will have been completed and you can use the  
SD card as usual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
Before You Start  
3Set the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off  
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after a certain  
time of non-operation. You can change this auto power-off time. If you  
do not want the camera to turn off automatically, set this to [Off]. After  
the power turns off, you can turn on the camera again by pressing the  
shutter button or other button.  
Select [Auto power off].  
1
  Under the [5] tab, select [Auto  
power off], then press <0>.  
Set the desired time.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
setting, then press <0>.  
Even if [Off] has been set, the LCD mowill tun off automatically after  
30 min. to save power. (The camepor does not turn off.)  
3Silencing the Beper  
Prevents the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved.  
1 Select [Beep].  
  Under the [2] tab, select [Beep], then press <0>.  
2 Select [Off].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Off], then press <0>.  
3Card Reminder  
This prevents shooting if there is no card in the camera.  
1 Select [Release shutter without card].  
  Under the [2] tab, select [Release shutter without card], then  
press <0>.  
2 Select [Disable].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Disable], then press <0>.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52  
Before You Start  
3Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings  
The camera’s shooting settings and menu settings can be reverted to the default.  
Select [Clear all camera settings].  
  Under the [7] tab, select [Clear all  
1
camera settings], then press <0>.  
Select [OK].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],  
2
then press <0>.  
X The camera’s default settings will be  
as shown below.  
Shooting Settings  
Shooting mode d (Program AE)  
One-Shot AF  
Image-recording Settings  
ecorfunc.  
mage size  
Standard  
3 (Large)  
8
AF mode  
AF point  
Automatic sePEG quality  
ISO speed  
A (AUTO)  
q (Evaluative  
metering  
Metering mode  
)
Picture Style  
P
(Standard)  
Drive mode  
u
(Single shooting) Peripheralillumination Enable/Correction  
correction  
data retained  
Exposure  
compensation  
0 (Zero)  
Canceled  
0 (Zero)  
Color space  
White balance  
sRGB  
AEB  
Q (Auto)  
Flash exposure  
compensation  
Registered  
setting retained  
Custom WB data  
Personal WB  
External  
Speedlite control  
Registered  
setting retained  
Unchanged  
WB correction  
WB-BKT  
Canceled  
Canceled  
File numbering  
File name setting  
Continuous  
Preset code  
Copyright  
information  
Information  
retained  
Auto cleaning  
Enable  
Erased  
Dust Delete Data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
Before You Start  
Camera Settings  
Live View/Movie Shooting Settings  
Auto power off  
Beep  
1 min.  
On  
Disable  
Live mode  
Off  
LV z/k setting  
AF mode  
Release shutter  
without card  
Grid display  
Enable  
Exposure  
simulation  
Enable  
Review time  
2 sec.  
Highlight alert  
AF point display  
Disable  
Disable  
Movie-recording  
size  
1920x1080  
Sound recording On  
Metering timer 16 sec.  
Canceled  
(Center)  
Registered AF point  
Histogram  
Brightness  
Center  
Enlarge display  
10 images  
OnzD  
All image  
Image jump w/6  
Auto rotate  
Slide show  
LCD brightness  
Date/Time  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Unchaged  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Language  
Video system  
Basic settings  
My Menu settings  
Display from My  
Menu  
Disable  
Custom Functions Unchanged  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
Image Settings  
This chapter explains image-reld function settings:  
Image-recording quality, ISO sp, Picture Style, white  
balance, Auto Lighting Oper, lens peripheral  
illumination correction, etc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
Selecting the Card to Record or Playback  
This Instruction Manual assumes that a CF card or SD card is in the  
camera. When an external media is used via the Wireless File  
Transmitter WFT-E2 II A/B/C/D or WFT-E2/E2A (both sold separately),  
the <  
u
> icon will appear as the third recording media. It can be  
> and SD card <  
selected in the same way as with the CF card <  
f
g>.  
If either a CF card or an SD card is in the camera, the card to  
record images will be selected automatically.  
If both the CF and SD cards are in the camera, you can select the card  
for recording or playing images as follows:  
Press the <B> button. (9)  
1
  Press the <B> button once or  
twice to display the card and image  
size on the ear LCD panel.  
Card/Iage size z WB  
Sct te card.  
  the <6> dial to select the card  
for recording images.  
A : Record to CF card  
S : Record to SD card  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
image size (p.59).  
2
3Card Selection and Recording and Playback  
 
You can also use the [  
5
Record func+media/folder sel.] menu’s [Record/  
play] ([Playback]) option to select the card. Depending on the [Record func.  
]
(p.57) setting, the operation selected here will have a different function.  
[Standard] [Auto switch media]  
The operation explained on this page selects the card for recording  
and playing back images.  
[Rec. separately] [Rec. to multiple]  
The captured image is recorded to the CF card and SD card  
simultaneously. In this case, the operation explained on this page  
selects the card for playing back images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56  
Selecting the Card to Record or Playback  
3Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted  
If both the CF card and SD card are inserted into the camera, you can  
set the recording method for the cards.  
Select [Record func+media/folder  
sel.].  
  Under the [5] tab, select [Record  
func+media/folder sel.], then press  
<0>.  
1
Select [Record func.].  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Record  
func.], then press <0>.  
Select the recording method.  
3
  The <5> dial to select the  
recrding method, then press <0>.  
  Standard  
Images will be recorded to the card selected with the procedure on  
the preceding page.  
  Auto switch media  
Same as with the [Standard] setting, but if the card becomes full,  
the camera will automatically switch to the other card to record  
images.  
  Rec. separately  
You can set the image size to be recorded for each card (p.59). Each  
image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards at the image size  
you have set. The image size can be set freely to 3 and 5 or 1  
and K1, for example.  
  Rec. to multiple  
Each image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards simultaneously  
at the same image size. You can also select RAW+JPEG.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
Selecting the Card to Record or Playback  
  When [Auto switch media] is set, the card for recording will switch from  
f to g to u.  
  When [Rec. separately] or [Rec. to multiple] is set, the image will be  
recorded under the same file number to both the CF and SD cards. Also,  
the top LCD panel and viewfinder will display the number of possible  
shots of the card having the lower number. If one of the cards becomes  
full, [Card* full] will be displayed and shooting will be disabled. If this  
happens, either replace the card or set the recording method to  
[Standard] or [Auto switch media] and select the card with remaining  
space to continue shooting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58  
Setting the Image-recording Quality  
You can set the image size (recorded pixels), image type (JPEG or  
RAW), and JPEG quality (compression rate).  
Selecting the Image Size  
3/4/5/6 will record the image as a JPEG image. In the 1/K1/  
61 mode, the image will require processing with the software  
provided.  
You can set the image size in one of the two ways below.  
Using the Rear LCD Panel to Set the Image Size  
Press the <B> button. (9)  
1
  Press the <B> button once or  
twice to display the card and image  
size on te rear LCD panel.  
magsize/Card z WB  
ct the image size.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
image size.  
  If 1/K1/61 and 3/4/5/6 are  
displayed at the same time, the RAW  
and JPEG image will be recorded  
simultaneously on the card.  
  Turn the <6> dial to select the card  
to record or playback images (p.56).  
When [Record func.] is set to [Rec. separately] (p.57), turn the <6> dial  
to select the card and set the image size for the respective card.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
Setting the Image-recording Quality  
Using the Menu Screen to Set the Image Size  
Select [Image size].  
  Under the [2] tab, select [Image  
1
size], then press <0>.  
Set the image size.  
2
  To select a RAW image size, turn the  
<6> dial. To select a JPEG image  
size, turn the <5> dial.  
 
On the screen, the “***M (megapixels)  
**** x ****” number indicates the  
recorded pil count, and [****] is the  
numf posible shots.  
  ss 0> to set it.  
Image Size Setting Examples  
3 only  
1 only  
61+5  
  If [–] is set for both RAW and JPEG, 3 will be set.  
  If [Record func.] is set to [Rec. separately] (p.57), the setting screen will  
be different. You can set the image size for each card.  
  In accordance with the selected image size, the <p> or <1> icon will  
be displayed on the right side in the viewfinder.  
  The image size icons indicate the following: 1 (RAW), K1 (Medium  
RAW), 61 (Small RAW), JPEG, 3 (Large), 4 (Medium 1), 5  
(Medium 2), 6 (Small).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60  
Setting the Image-recording Quality  
Guide to Image-recording Quality Settings (Approx.)  
Pixels  
Recorded  
File Size Possible Maximum  
(MB)  
Image Size  
Print Size  
Shots  
692  
874  
1148  
1957  
175  
139  
145  
152  
161  
263  
190  
202  
214  
232  
397  
251  
272  
294  
329  
Burst  
85 (121)  
111 (164)  
182 (309)  
1957 (5447)  
26 (28)  
20 (20)  
20 (20)  
20 (20)  
20 (20)  
33 (35)  
20 (20)  
20 (20)  
20 (20)  
20 (20)  
43 (43)  
20 (20)  
20 (20)  
20 (20)  
20 (20)  
3
16.0M  
12.4M  
A3 or larger  
Around A3  
A4 or larger  
A5 or larger  
A3 or larger  
5.7  
4
4.5  
5
8.4M  
3.5  
6
4.0M  
2.0  
1
16.0M  
22.2  
1+3  
1+4  
1+5  
1+6  
K1  
16.0M+16.0M  
16.0M+12.4M  
16.0M+8.4M  
16.0M+4.0M  
9.0M  
22.2+5.7  
22.2+4.5  
22.2+3.5  
22.+2.0  
18  
-
A4 or larg
K1+3  
K1+4  
K1+5  
K1+6  
61  
9.0M+16.0M  
9.0M+12.4M  
9.0M+8.4M  
9.0M+4.0M  
4.0M  
14.8+5.7  
14.8+4.5  
14.8+3.5  
14.8+2.0  
9.9  
A5 or larger  
61+3  
61+4  
61+5  
61+6  
4.0M+16.0M  
4.0M+12.4M  
4.0M+8.4M  
4.0M+4.0M  
9.9+5.7  
9.9+4.5  
9.9+3.5  
9.9+2.0  
-
  Figures for the file size, possible shots, and maximum burst during continuous  
shooting are based on Canon’s 4GB testing card and Canon’s testing  
standards (JPEG quality 8, ISO 100, and Standard Picture Style). These  
figures will vary depending on the subject, card brand, ISO speed,  
Picture Style, Custom Functions, and other settings.  
  The maximum burst applies to <o> high-speed continuous shooting.  
Figures in parentheses apply to an Ultra DMA (UDMA) mode 6 16GB card  
based on Canon’s testing standards.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
Setting the Image-recording Quality  
About RAW  
A RAW image is the raw data output by the image sensor, converted to  
digital data and recorded on the card as is. You can select from 1,  
K1, or 61 (Commonly referred as RAW in this manual).  
With RAW images, you can use the provided software to make various  
adjustments as desired and then generate a JPEG, TIFF, etc., image.  
Commercially-available software might not be able to display RAW images.  
Using the provided software is recommended.  
Maximum Burst During Continuous Shooting  
The maximum burst during continuous shooting indicated  
on the preceding page is the number of continuous shots  
that can be taken without ppin, based on a formatted  
card.  
In the viewfinder, throxmate maximum burst is  
indicated on te righ.  
  The maximum burst is displayed even when a card is not inserted in the  
camera. Make sure that a card is loaded before taking a picture.  
  If [8C.Fn II -2: High ISO speed noise reduction] is set to [2: Strong],  
the maximum burst will be greatly reduced (p.214).  
  If the viewfinder displays “99” for the maximum burst, it means the  
maximum burst is 99 or higher. If the maximum burst decreases to 98 or  
lower and the internal buffer memory becomes full, “buSY” will be  
displayed on the top LCD panel and in the viewfinder and shooting will  
be disabled temporarily. If you stop the continuous shooting, the  
maximum burst will increase. After all the captured images are written to  
the card, the maximum burst will be as listed on page 61.  
  The maximum burst indicator in the viewfinder will not change even  
when you use a UDMA CF card. However, the maximum burst shown in  
parentheses on page 61 will apply.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62  
Setting the Image-recording Quality  
3Setting the JPEG Quality (Compression Rate)  
The recording quality (compression rate) can be set for each image size  
3/4/5/6.  
Select [JPEG quality].  
1
  Under the [2] tab, select [JPEG  
quality], then press <0>.  
Select the image size.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
image sie, then press <0>.  
Set the desired quality  
3 (compression rate).  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
setting, then press <0>.  
  The higher the number, the higher the  
quality will be (lower compression).  
  For 6 - 10, <i> is displayed. For 1 -  
5, <o> is displayed.  
The higher the recording quality, the fewer the number of possible shots will  
be. On the other hand, the lower the recording quality, the higher the  
number of possible shots will be.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
Z: Setting the ISO Speed  
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the  
ambient light level.  
Press the <Z> button. (9)  
1
2
Set the ISO speed.  
  While looking at the top LCD panel or  
in the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.  
  ISO speed can be set within ISO 100-  
12800 in 1/3-stop increments.  
  With “A” selected, the ISO speed will  
be set automatically (p.65).  
ISO Speed Guide (No flash)  
ISO Speed  
100 - 400  
Shooting Sitatio
Sunny ou
Flash Range  
The higher the ISO speed,  
the farther the flash range  
will be.  
400 - 1600  
Overcast kies or eng time  
1600 - 12800,  
H1, H2, H3  
Dark indoors or night  
  If [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [1: Enable], “L”  
(equivalent to ISO 50), ISO 100/125/160, “H1” (equivalent to ISO 12800),  
H2” (equivalent to ISO 25600) and “H3” (equivalent to ISO 102400)  
cannot be set (p.215).  
  Using a high ISO speed or shooting in high-temperature conditions may  
result in more grainy images. Long exposures can also cause irregular  
colors in the image.  
  When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (horizontal banding, dots of  
light, etc.) or irregular colors may appear. Also, if you shoot with the ISO  
speed range upper limit expanded to H1, H2 or H3 with [8C.Fn I -3: Set  
ISO speed range] (p.208), noise and irregular colors may become more  
visible.  
With [8C.Fn I -3: Set ISO speed range], the ISO speed range can be  
expanded from ISO 50 (L) to ISO 102400 (H3).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64  
Z: Setting the ISO Speed  
About “A” (Auto) ISO Speed  
If the ISO speed is set to “A”, the actual  
ISO speed to be set will be displayed  
when you press the shutter button  
halfway. As indicated below, the ISO  
speed will be set automatically to suit the  
shooting mode.  
Default ISO Speed  
Shooting Mode  
d/s/f/a  
Bulb  
ISO Speed Setting  
ISO 100 - 12800  
Fixed at ISO 400  
Fixed at ISO 400*  
With flash  
* If the shooting mode is <d> and bounce lash set with an external Speedlite,  
ISO 400-1600 will be set automatically
* If fill flash results in overexposuO 10 or a higher ISO will be set.  
With [8C.Fn I -3: Set ISO speed range] (p.208), the upper and lower limit  
settings and ISO Auto setting will work as follows.  
In d/s/f/a shooting modes  
  Even if the upper limit is set to H1, H2, or H3 and the lower limit to L, ISO  
100-12800 will be set automatically.  
  If you narrowed the upper and lower limits from the default setting, the  
ISO speed will be set automatically within the range you have set.  
With bulb exposures and flash photography  
  If ISO 400 is not within the upper and lower limit, the ISO speed will be  
set close to 400.  
Even if [8C.Fn I -3: Set ISO speed range], [8C.Fn I -12: Set shutter  
speed range] (p.211), or [8C.Fn I -13: Set aperture value range] (p.211)  
is set to limit the settable range, if [8C.Fn I -8: Safety shift] (p.210) is set  
to [1: Enable (Tv/Av)] or [2: Enable (ISO speed)], a setting outside the  
limited range might be set to obtain a correct exposure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
65  
A
Selecting a Picture Style  
By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image effects matching  
your photographic expression or the subject.  
Press the <A> button.  
1
  When the camera is ready to shoot,  
press the <A> button.  
X The Picture Style screen will appear.  
Select a Picture Style.  
2
  Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select  
a Picture Style, then press <0>.  
X The Picture Style will be set and the  
camera will be ready to shoot.  
You can also use the [1 Picture yle] nu to select the Picture Style.  
Picture Style Effects  
P Standard  
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose  
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.  
Q Portrait  
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Effective for close-ups  
of women or children.  
By changing the [Color tone] (p.68), you can adjust the skin tone.  
R Landscape  
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.  
Effective for impressive landscapes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
66  
A Selecting a Picture Style  
S Neutral  
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with  
their computer. For natural colors and subdued images.  
U Faithful  
This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with  
their computer. When the subject is captured under a daylight color  
temperature of 5200K, the color is adjusted colorimetrically to match  
the subject’s color. The image is dull and subdued.  
V Monochrome  
Creates black-and-white images.  
JPEG images shot in Monochrome cannot be reverted to color. If you  
want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure the [Monochrome]  
setting has been canceled. When [Monochrome] is selected, <0>  
will appear on the rear LCD panel.  
W User Def. 1-3  
You can select a base Pictyle such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],  
a Picture Style file, etc., adjs desired and register it under [User  
Def. *] (p.70). Any Uer Defined Picture Style which has not been set  
will have the same settings as the Standard Picture Style.  
About the Symbols  
The symbols on the top of the Picture Style selection screen refer to parameters  
such as [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. The numerals indicate the parameter  
settings, such as [Sharpness] and [Contrast], for each Picture Style.  
Symbols  
g
h
i
j
k
l
Sharpness  
Contrast  
Saturation  
Color tone  
Filter effect (Monochrome)  
Toning effect (Monochrome)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
A
Customizing a Picture Style  
You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters  
like [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. To see the resulting effects, take test  
shots. To customize [Monochrome], see the next page.  
Press the <A> button.  
1
Select a Picture Style.  
2
  Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select  
a Picture Style, then press the  
<B> button.  
Select a parameter.  
3
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
parameter, then press <0>.  
Set the parameter.  
4
  Turn the <5> dial to set the  
parameter as desired, then press  
<0>.  
  Press the <M> button to save  
the adjusted parameters. The Picture  
Style selection screen will reappear.  
X Any settings different from the default  
will be displayed in blue.  
Parameter Settings and Effects  
g Sharpness  
h Contrast  
0: Less sharp outline  
-4: Low contrast  
+7: Sharp outline  
+4: High contrast  
i Saturation  
j Color tone  
-4: Low saturation  
-4: Reddish skin tone  
+4: High saturation  
+4: Yellowish skin tone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
68  
A Customizing a Picture Style  
  By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the respective  
Picture Style to its default parameter settings.  
  To shoot with the Picture Style you modified, follow step 2 on the  
preceding page to select the modified Picture Style and then shoot.  
Monochrome Adjustment  
For Monochrome, you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect] in  
addition to [Sharpness] and [Contrast].  
kFilter Effect  
With a filter effect applied to a  
monochrome image, you can make  
white clouds or green trees stand out  
more.  
Filter  
Sample Effects  
N: None  
Normal blak-and-wimage with no filter effects.  
The blue sky will ook more natural, and the white clouds will look  
crisper.  
Ye: Yellow  
Or: Orange  
R: Red  
The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more brilliant.  
The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and brighter.  
Skin tones and lips will look fine. Tree leaves will look crisper and  
brighter.  
G: Green  
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.  
lToning Effect  
By applying a toning effect, you can create  
a monochrome image in that color. It can  
make the image look more impressive.  
The following can be selected: [N:None  
]
[
S:Sepia] [B:Blue] [P:Purple] [G:Green].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
69  
A
Registering a Picture Style  
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],  
adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],  
[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3].  
You can create Picture Styles whose parameter settings such as for sharpness  
and contrast are different. You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style  
which has been registered to the camera with the provided software.  
Press the <A> button.  
1
2
Select [User Def.].  
  Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select  
[User Def. *], then press the <B>  
button.  
P<0>.  
  [Picture Style] selected, press  
3
<0>.  
Select the base Picture Style.  
4
  Turn the <5> dial to select the base  
Picture Style, then press <0>.  
 
To adjust the parameters of a Picture  
Style which has been registered to the  
camera with the provided software,  
select the Picture Style here.  
Select a parameter.  
5
  Turn the <5> dial to select a  
parameter such as [Sharpness], then  
press <0>.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
70  
A Registering a Picture Style  
Set the parameter.  
6
  Turn the <5> dial to set the  
parameter as desired, then press  
<0>.  
For details, see “Customizing a  
Picture Style” on pages 68-69.  
  Press the <M> button to register  
the new Picture Style. The Picture  
Style selection screen will then  
reappear.  
X The base Picture Style will be  
indicated on the right of [User Def. *].  
If a Picture Style has already been registered under [User Def. *], changing  
the base Picture Style in step 4 will nullify the parameter settings of the  
registered Picture Style.  
To shoot with the registered Picture Style, follow step 2 on the preceding  
page to select [User Def. *] and then shoot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
71  
Setting the White Balance  
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally,  
the <Q> (Auto) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-  
looking colors cannot be obtained with <Q>, you can set the white  
balance manually to suit the respective light source.  
Press the <B> button. (9)  
1
  Press the <B> button once or  
twice to display the WB on the rear  
LCD panel’s upper right.  
WB z Card/Image size  
Select the white balance.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select the WB.  
Display  
Q
W
Mode  
Color Tempeature (Approx. K: Kelvin)  
Auto  
000 - 7000  
5200  
Daylight  
Shade  
E
R
7000  
Cloudy, twilight, suset  
Tungsten light  
6000  
Y
3200  
U
White fluorescent light  
Flash use  
4000  
I
6000  
O
P
Custom (p.73)  
2000 - 10000  
2500 - 10000  
Color temperature (p.78)  
About White Balance  
To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of lighting.  
With a digital camera, the color temperature is adjusted with software to make  
the white areas look white. This adjustment serves as the basis for the color  
correction. The result is natural-looking colors in the pictures.  
  You can also use the [1 White balance] menu to set the white balance.  
  To set Personal WB, select [PC-*]. To save the Personal WB to the  
camera, use the provided software. If Personal WB has not been  
registered, [PC-*] will not be displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72  
O Custom White Balance  
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance  
for a specific light source for better accuracy. Up to five Custom white  
balance data can be registered to the camera. You can also append a  
name (caption) to the registered Custom white balance data.  
3Registering Custom WB  
There are two ways to register Custom white balance data. You can  
either take a picture and register it, or register an image already saved  
in the card.  
Capture and register the image  
Select [Custom WB regist.].  
1
  Under the [1] tab, select [Custom  
WB regit.], then press <0>.  
ect the Custom WB No. to be  
2 registered.  
  Press <0>.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select 1 to 5 for  
<O*>, then press <0>. The  
Custom WB data will be registered  
under the selected No.  
Select [Record and register  
3 image].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Record  
and register image], then press  
<0>.  
X The LCD monitor will turn off, and the  
selected No. [ * ] will blink on the rear  
LCD panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
73  
O Custom White Balance  
Photograph a solid-white object.  
  The plain, white object should fill the  
center spot metering circle.  
4
  Focus manually and set the standard  
exposure for the white object.  
  Any white balance mode may be set.  
Spot metering circle  
X The Custom WB data will be  
registered.  
  To use the Custom WB, see  
“Selecting and Shooting with the  
Custom WB data” (p.76).  
  Custom WB data can alsbregistered as follows:  
1. Press the <B> button and turn the <5> dial to select <O>  
(p.72).  
2. Then turn the <6> dial to select the No. under which the Custom  
WB is to be registered.  
3. Press the <A> button.  
[ * ] will blink on the rear LCD panel.  
4. Follow step 4 above to photograph a solid-white object.  
The Custom WB data will be registered under the selected No.  
When a picture is taken, the registered Custom white balance will be  
applied.  
  If the exposure of the picture differs greatly from the standard exposure,  
a correct white balance might not be obtained. If [Correct WB may not  
be obtained with the selected image] is displayed in step 4, go back to  
step 1 and try again.  
  The image captured in step 4 will not be recorded to the card.  
  Instead of a white object, an 18% gray card (commercially available) can  
produce a more accurate white balance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
74  
O Custom White Balance  
Register image on card  
First follow step 4 under “Capture and register the image” (p.73,  
74) to take a picture of a plain, white object. This image saved in  
the card can then be registered for Custom WB. The procedure up  
to step 2 is the same as with “Capture and register the image”.  
Select [Custom WB regist.].  
1
Select the Custom WB No. to be  
2 registered.  
Select [Register image on card].  
3
 
Turn the <  
image on card], then press <  
5
> dial to select [Register  
>.  
0
X The imaes saved in the card will be  
dyed.  
ct the image to be used for  
4 ristrating the Custom WB data.  
 
You can also display a four- or nine-image  
index by pressing the <y> button.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
image to be registered for the Custom  
WB data, then press <0>.  
Select [OK].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],  
then press <0>.  
5
X
The Custom WB data will be registered.  
When the message appears, press  
<0> to return to step 3.  
 
To use the Custom WB, see “Selecting and  
Shooting with the Custom WB data” (p.76).  
If the image was captured while the Picture Style was set to [Monochrome]  
(p.67), it cannot be selected in step 4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
75  
O Custom White Balance  
3Selecting and Shooting with the Custom WB data  
Registered image  
Select the Custom WB No.  
  On the Custom WB registration  
1
screen, select the No. of the  
registered Custom WB.  
Select [Set as white balance].  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Set as  
white balance], then press <0>.  
X The WB will be set to the registered  
<O
Tathpicture.  
X picture will be taken with the  
3
<O*> setting.  
You can also select the Custom WB No. while looking at the rear LCD panel.  
Press the <B> button and turn the <5> dial to select <O>. Then turn  
the <6> dial to select the registered Custom WB No.  
3Naming the Custom WB data  
You can also append a name (caption) to the registered Custom white  
balance data.  
Select the Custom WB No.  
1
  On the Custom WB data registration  
screen, select the Custom WB No. to  
be appended with a name.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
76  
O Custom White Balance  
Select [Edit caption].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Edit  
caption], then press <0>.  
2
3
Enter any name.  
  Press the <H> button, and the text  
palette will be highlighted in a color  
frame and text can be entered.  
  Operate the <5> dial or <9> to  
move the and select the desired  
characteThen press <0> to enter  
it
Yocan enter up to 20 characters.  
o delete a character, press the <L>  
button.  
Exit the setting.  
  After entering the name, press the  
<M> button.  
4
X The name will be saved and the  
screen will return to step 2. The  
entered name will be displayed below  
<O*>.  
Entering a name which indicates the Custom WB’s place or light source type  
makes it convenient.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
P Setting the Color Temperature  
You can set the white balance’s color temperature numerically in Kelvin.  
This is for advanced users.  
Press the <B> button. (9)  
1
  Press the <B> button once or  
twice to display the white balance on  
the rear LCD panel’s upper right.  
WB z Card/Image size  
Select <P>.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select <P>.  
2
Set the desired color  
3 temperature.  
  Turn the <6> dial to set the color  
temure.  
  e cor temperature can be set  
2500K to 10000K in 100K  
increments.  
  When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set white  
balance correction (magenta or green) as necessary.  
  If you want to set <P> to the reading taken with a commercially-  
available color temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting  
to compensate for the difference between the color temperature meter’s  
reading and the camera’s color temperature reading.  
You can also use the [1 White balance] menu to set the white balance.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78  
uWhite Balance Correction  
You can correct the white balance that has been set. This adjustment  
will have the same effect as using a commercially-available color  
temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color  
can be corrected to one of nine levels.  
This is for advanced users who are familiar with using color temperature  
conversion or color compensating filters.  
White Balance Correction  
Select [WB SHIFT/BKT].  
1
  Under the [1] tab, select [WB  
SHIFT/BKT], then press <0>.  
Set whie balance correction.  
2
se <9> to move the “ ” mark to the  
esired position.  
  B is for blue, A is amber, M is  
magenta, and G is green. The color in  
the respective direction will be  
Sample setting: A2, G1  
corrected.  
  On the upper right, “SHIFT” indicates  
the direction and correction amount.  
  Pressing the <B> button will  
cancel all the [WB SHIFT/BKT]  
settings.  
  Press <0> to exit the setting and  
return to the menu.  
  During the white balance correction, <u> will be displayed in the  
viewfinder and on the rear LCD panel.  
  One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to 5 mireds of a color  
temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating the  
density of a color temperature conversion filter.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
79  
uWhite Balance Correction  
White Balance Auto Bracketing  
With just one shot, three images having a different color balance can be  
recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current white  
balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber bias or  
magenta/green bias. This is called white balance bracketing (WB-BKT). White  
balance bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels in single-level increments.  
Set the white balance bracketing amount.  
 
In step 2 for white balance correction, when  
you turn the < > dial, the “ mark on the  
screen will change to “ (3 points).  
5
Turning the dial to the right sets the B/  
A bracketing, and turning it to the left  
sets the M/G bracketing.  
B/A bias ±3 levels  
X On the right ide of the screen, “BKT”  
indicthe bracketing direction and  
bracketing amount.  
 
sing the <  
B> button will cancel  
all the [WB SHIFT/BKT] settings.  
  Press <0> to exit the setting and  
return to the menu.  
Bracketing Sequence  
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard  
white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard  
white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, 3. Green (G) bias.  
 
During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will be  
lower and the number of possible shots will also decrease to one-third the  
normal number. Also, the white balance icon will blink on the rear LCD panel.  
  You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white  
balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance  
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.  
  Since three images are recorded for one shot, the card will take longer to  
record the shot.  
  BKT” stands for Bracketing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80  
Auto Lighting Optimizer  
If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and  
contrast can be corrected automatically. With JPEG images, the  
correction is done when the image is captured. Setting information is  
appended to RAW images and automatic correction is possible with  
Digital Photo Professional (provided software).  
By default, [Standard] is set. However, with [8C.Fn II -4: Auto  
Lighting Optimizer], you can adjust the correction amount (p.215).  
Set [8C.Fn II -4: Auto Lighting  
Optimizer].  
  Set the correction amount.  
  For details on setting a Custom  
Function, see page 204.  
1
Take he pcture.  
Thmage will be recorded with the  
2
rigtness and contrast corrected if  
ecessary.  
Î
Sample of corrected brightness  
  If [8C.Fn II -4: Auto Lighting Optimizer] is set to a setting other than  
[3: Disable], the image might still look bright even if manual exposure,  
exposure compensation, or flash exposure compensation has been set  
to make the exposure darker. If you want the darker exposure, set the  
Auto Lighting Optimizer to [3: Disable] first (p.215).  
  Depending on the shooting conditions, noise might increase.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
81  
3
Lens Peripheral Illumination Correction  
Due to the lens characteristics, the four corners of the picture might look  
darker. This is called lens light fall-off or drop in peripheral illumination.  
With JPEG images, the correction is done when the image is captured.  
Setting information is appended to RAW images and automatic correction  
is possible with Digital Photo Professional (provided software).  
The default setting is [Enable].  
Select [Peripheral illumin.  
correct.].  
  Under the [1] tab, select  
[Peripheral illumin. correct.], then  
press <0>.  
1
Set the correction setting.  
2
  On the scren, check that  
[Coion ata available] is  
plaed for the attached lens.  
  orrection data not available] is  
dlayed, see “About the Lens  
Correction Data” on the next page.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Enable],  
then press <0>.  
Take the picture.  
  The image will be recorded with the  
3
corrected peripheral illumination.  
Correction enabled  
Correction disabled  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82  
3 Lens Peripheral Illumination Correction  
About the Lens Correction Data  
The camera already contains lens peripheral illumination correction  
data for approx. 25 lenses. In step 2, if you select [Enable], the  
peripheral light correction will be applied automatically for any lens  
whose correction data has been registered in the camera.  
With EOS Utility (provided software), you can check which lenses have  
their correction data registered in the camera. You can also register the  
correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, see the Software  
Instruction Manual (CD-ROM) for EOS Utility.  
  For JPEG images aeadcaptured, lens peripheral light correction  
cannot be applied.  
  Depending on shooting conditions, noise might appear on the image  
periphery.  
  When using a third-party lens, setting the correction to [Disable] is  
recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.  
  Lens peripheral light correction is applied even when an Extender is  
attached.  
  If the correction data for the attached lens has not been registered to the  
camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to  
[Disable].  
  The correction amount applied will be slightly lower than the maximum  
correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional (provided  
software).  
  If the lens does not have distance information, the correction amount will  
be lower.  
  The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
83  
3Creating and Selecting a Folder  
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images  
are to be saved.  
This is optional since a folder will be created automatically for saving  
captured images.  
Create a Folder  
Select [Record func+media/folder  
sel.].  
  Under the [5] tab, select [Record  
func+media/folder sel.], then press  
<0>.  
1
Select [Foldr].  
  SeleFoldr], then press <0>.  
2
Select [Create folder].  
3
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Create  
folder], then press <0>.  
Select [OK].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],  
4
then press <0>.  
X A new folder with a higher one-up  
folder number is created.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84  
3Creating and Selecting a Folder  
Selecting a Folder  
  With the Select folder screen  
Lowest file number  
Number of images  
in folder  
displayed, turn the <5> dial to select  
the desired folder, then press <0>.  
X The folder where the captured  
images will be saved is selected.  
  Subsequent captured images will be  
recorded into the selected folder.  
Folder name  
Highest file number  
About Folders  
As with “100EOS1D” for example, the folder name starts with three digits  
(folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can contain  
up to 9999 images (file No. 0001 - 9999). When a folder becomes full, a new  
folder with a higher one-up folder number is created automatically. Also, if  
manual reset (p.89) is executed, a new folder will be created automatically.  
Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created.  
Creating Folders with a Personal Computer  
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open  
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and  
organize your images. The folder name must follow the “100ABC_D” format  
where the first three digits is 100 - 999 followed by five alphanumeric  
characters. The five characters can be a combination of upper- or lower-case  
letters from A to Z, numerals, and an underscore “_”. There can be no space in  
the folder name. Also, folder names cannot have the same three-digit number  
such as “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ” even if the letters are different.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
3Changing the File Name  
The file name has four alphanumeric characters  
followed by a four-digit image number (p.88) and  
extension. The first four alphanumeric characters  
are set upon factory shipment and unique to the  
camera. However, you can change it.  
(Ex.) BE3B0001.JPG  
With “User setting1,” you can change and register the four characters as desired.  
With “User setting2,” if you register three characters, the fourth character from  
the left will be appended automatically to indicate the image size.  
Registering or Changing the File Name  
Select [File name setting].  
1
  Under the [5] tab, select [File name  
setting], then press <0>.  
Select ange User setting].  
2
  n te <5> dial to select [Change  
setting*], then press <0>.  
Enter any alphanumeric  
3 characters.  
 
For User setting1, enter four characters.  
For User setting2, enter three characters.  
  Press the <L> button to delete any  
unnecessary characters.  
  Press the <H> button, and the text  
palette will be highlighted in a color  
frame and text can be entered.  
  Operate the <5> dial or <9> to  
move the and select the desired  
character. Then press <0> to enter  
it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86  
3Changing the File Name  
Exit the setting.  
4
5
  Enter the required number of  
alphanumeric characters, then press  
the <M> button.  
X The new file name will be registered  
and the screen in step 2 will reappear.  
Select the registered file name.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [File  
name], then press <0>.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
registered file name, then press  
<0>.  
  If User setting2 has been registered,  
select “**(the 3 characters  
rere) + image size”.  
Settings  
About User setting2  
When you select the “*** + image size” registered with User setting2 and  
take pictures, the image size character will be automatically appended as  
the file name’s fourth character from the left. The meaning of the image size  
characters is as follows:  
“*** L” = 3, 1  
“*** N” = 5  
“***M” = 4, K1  
“***S” = 6, 61  
When the image is transferred to a personal computer, the automatically  
appended fourth character will be included. You can then see the image size  
without having to open the image. The image type (RAW or JPEG) can be  
distinguished with the extension.  
  The first character cannot be an underscore “_”.  
  The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG images, “.CR2” for RAW images,  
and “.MOV” for movies.  
  When you shoot a movie with User setting2, the file name’s fourth  
character will be an underscore “_”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
87  
3File Numbering Methods  
The four-digit file number is like the frame  
number on a roll of film. The captured images  
are assigned a sequential file number from  
0001 to 9999 and saved in one folder. You can  
change how the file number is assigned.  
(Ex.) BE3B0001.JPG  
Select [File numbering].  
  Under the [5] tab, select [File  
1
numbering], then press <0>.  
Select the file numbering method.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
desired method, then press <0>.  
2
Continuous  
Continues the file numbering sequene evn after the card is  
replaced or a new folder is created.  
Even after you replace the card, e a folder, or switch the target  
card (such as f g), thfile nring continues in sequence up to  
9999 for the images savedThis is convenient when you want to save  
images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 in multiple cards or  
folders into one folder in your personal computer.  
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images  
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images might  
continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or  
folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, you should use a  
newly-formatted card each time.  
File numbering after  
replacing the card  
File numbering after  
creating a folder  
Card A (f)  
Card B (g)  
Card A  
100  
101  
XXXX0051  
XXXX0052  
XXXX0051  
XXXX0052  
Next sequential file number  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88  
3File Numbering Methods  
Auto Reset  
The file numbering restarts from 0001 each time the card is  
replaced or a new folder is created.  
Even after you replace the card, create a folder, or switch the target  
card (such as f g), the file numbering continues in sequence from  
0001 for the images saved. This is convenient if you want to organize  
images according to cards or folders.  
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images  
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images might  
continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or  
folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from  
0001, use a newly formatted card each time.  
File numbering after  
replacing the card  
File numbering after  
creating a folder  
Card A (f)  
Card B (g
Card A  
100  
101  
XXXX0051  
XXXX0001  
XXXX0051  
10
File numbering is reset  
Manual Reset  
To reset the file numbering to 0001 or to start from file number  
0001 in a new folder.  
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created  
automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder  
starts from 0001.  
This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images  
taken yesterday and the ones taken today, for example. After the  
manual reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset.  
If the file number in folder No. 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be  
possible even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will  
display a message to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
3Setting Copyright Information  
When you set the copyright information, it will be appended to the  
image as Exif information. You can check the entered copyright  
information with the camera.  
Select [Copyright information].  
1
  Under the [7] tab, select [Copyright  
information], then press <0>.  
Select the desired option.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial, select either  
[Enter author’s name] or [Enter  
copyright details], then press <0>.  
Enttext.  
  Press the <H> button, and the text  
3
palette will be highlighted in a color  
frame. Text can be entered.  
  Operate the <5> dial or <9> to  
move the and select the desired  
character. Then press <0> to enter  
it.  
  You can enter up to 63 characters.  
  To delete a character, press the <L>  
button.  
Exit the setting.  
4
  After entering the text, press the  
<M> button.  
X The name will be saved and the  
screen will return to step 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
90  
3Setting Copyright Information  
Checking the Copyright Information  
When you select [Display copyright  
info.] in step 2 on the preceding page,  
you can check the [Author] and  
[Copyright] information that you  
entered.  
Deleting the Copyright Information  
When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2 on the  
preceding page, you can delete the [Author] and [Copyright]  
information.  
You can also enter the copyright information with EOS Utility (provided  
software).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
91  
3Setting the Color Space  
The color space refers to the range of reproducible colors. With this  
camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or  
Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.  
Select [Color space].  
1
  Under the [1] tab, select [Color  
space], then press <0>.  
Set the desired color space.  
2
  Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then  
press <0>.  
About Adobe RGB  
This color space is mainly used mmercial printing and other  
industrial uses. This settinis not mmended if you do not know  
about image processing, Aobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File  
System 2.0 (Exif 2.21). The image will look very subdued in a sRGB  
personal computer environment and with printers not compatible with  
Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21). Post-processing of  
the image with software will therefore be required.  
  If the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the  
first character in the file name will be an underscore “_”.  
 
The ICC profile is not appended. See explanations about ICC profile in  
the Software Instruction Manual in the CD-ROM.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
Setting the AF and  
Drive Modes  
The Area F frame has 45 AF  
points (39 gh-precision cross-  
typts and 6 AF points). You  
can t any one of the 45 AF  
points to match your composition.  
You can also select the AF mode and drive mode best  
matching the shooting conditions and subject.  
<f> stands for auto focus. <g> stands for manual focus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
93  
E: Selecting the AF Mode  
Select the AF mode suiting the shooting conditions or subject.  
On the lens, set the focus mode  
switch to <AF>.  
1
Press the <o> button.  
(9)  
2
Select the Amode.  
3
  While ookinat the top LCD panel,  
turn <6> dial.  
: One-Shot AF  
Z : AI Servo AF  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
94  
E: Selecting the AF Mode  
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects  
Suited for still subjects. When you  
press the shutter button halfway, the  
camera will focus only once.  
  When focus is achieved, the AF point  
which achieved focus will flash in red,  
and the focus confirmation light <o>  
in the viewfinder will also light.  
  With evaluative metering, the  
exposure setting will be set at the  
same time focus is achieved.  
  While you hold down the shutter  
button halfway, the focus will be  
lockedYu can then recompose the  
sf desred.  
AF point  
Focus confirmation light  
AF s also possible by pressing the  
p> button.  
  If focus cannot be achieved, the focus confirmation light <o> in the  
viewfinder will blink. If this occurs, a picture cannot be taken even if the  
shutter button is pressed completely. Recompose the picture and try to  
focus again. Or see “When Autofocus Fails” (p.100).  
  If the [2 Beep] menu is set to [Off], the beeper will not sound when  
focus is achieved (p.52).  
Focus Lock  
After achieving focus with One-Shot AF, you can lock the focus on a subject  
and recompose the shot. This is called “focus lock.” This is convenient when  
you want to focus a subject not covered by the Area AF frame.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
95  
E: Selecting the AF Mode  
AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects  
This AF mode is for moving subjects  
when the focusing distance keeps  
changing. While you hold down the  
shutter button halfway, the subject  
will be focused continuously.  
  The exposure is set at the moment  
the picture is taken.  
  AF is also possible by pressing the  
<p> button.  
Focus Tracking with AI Servo AF  
If the subject approaches or retreats from the camera at a constant rate,  
the camera tracks the subject and predicts thfocusing distance  
immediately before the picture is taken. This ifor obtaining correct  
focus at the moment of exposure.  
  When the AF point selection omatic (p.97), the camera first  
uses the center AF point to fouring autofocusing, if the subject  
moves away from the cnter AF point, focus tracking continues as  
long as the subject is covered by the Area AF frame.  
  With a manually selected AF point, the selected AF point will focus  
track the subject.  
With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.  
Also, the focus confirmation light <o> in the viewfinder will not light.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
96  
SSelecting the AF Point  
Select one of the 45 AF points to autofocus. Manual selection enables  
you to select one of the 45 AF points. And automatic selection has  
the camera automatically select one of the 45 AF points.  
Press the <S> button. (9)  
1
X The current AF point will be displayed  
in the viewfinder.  
Select the AF point.  
2
  Use <9> or turn the <6> or <5>  
dial.  
Automatic selection:  
Manual selection : SEL  
SEL AF (Off center)  
AF  
(Center)  
When the EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM is used ith an Extender, use the  
center AF point only. The other AF may cause a focusing error.  
When switching to a vertical A, two AF points might light up. In such a  
case, shooting will proeed with e two AF points automatically selected.  
With two AF points seleted, when you switch to a left or right AF point, only  
one AF point will be selected.  
Selecting with the Multi-controller  
  The AF point selection will change in  
the direction you tilt the <9>.  
  Pressing <9> straight down selects  
the center AF point. Pressing it  
straight down again sets it to  
automatic AF point selection.  
  If all the peripheral AF points light up,  
automatic AF point selection will take  
effect.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
97  
SSelecting the AF Point  
Selecting with the Dial  
  To select a horizontal AF point, turn  
the <6> dial.  
  To select a vertical AF point, turn the  
<5> dial.  
  If all the peripheral AF points light up,  
automatic AF point selection will take  
effect.  
  With [8C.Fn III -10: Selectapont], the selectable AF points can  
be limited to 19 or 11 AF points the inner or outer 9 AF points  
(p.223).  
  With [8C.Fn III -8: AF expansion w/selected pt], you can change the  
AF expansion to the left/right AF points, surrounding AF points, or all 45  
AF points (p.222).  
  If you use a super telephoto lens equipped with an Image Stabilizer and  
AF stop button, when [8C.Fn III -6: Lens AF stop button function] is  
set to [7: Spot AF], spot AF will be possible (p.220).  
  By registering the AF point you use frequently, you can switch to it  
instantly by setting C.Fn III -11-1/2 (p.224) or C.Fn III -6-6 (p.220).  
  If focus cannot be achieved with the external, EOS-dedicated Speedlite’s  
AF-assist beam, select the center AF point.  
Lens’ Maximum Aperture and AF Sensitivity  
With the EOS-1D Mark IV, higher precision AF is possible with a  
maximum aperture brighter than f/2.8 on a lens or when combined with  
an Extender.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
98  
SSelecting the AF Point  
Maximum f/stop: Up to f/2.8  
[Manual selection]  
With the 39 AF points indicated by , high-precision,  
cross-type AF (both horizontal- and vertical-line  
sensitive) is possible during manual AF point  
selection. The cross-type sensors’ vertical-line  
sensitivity is approx. two times higher than their  
horizontal-line sensitivity. The remaining six AF  
points will be horizontal-line sensitive.  
[Automatic selection]  
During automatic AF point selection, the number of  
cross-type AF points will decrease from 39 points to the  
19 points indicated with . The remaining 26 AF points  
will be horizontal-line sensitive.  
Maximum f/stop: f/4  
High-precision, cross-type AF with the center AF point is possible. The  
remaining 44 AF points will be horizontal-lie sensitive only.  
Maximum f/stop: f/5.6 or f/8  
With f/5.6 lenses, all the AF ps wbe horizontal-line sensitive only.  
With f/8 lenses, AF will be powith the center AF point being  
horizontal-line sensitive only. AF will not work with the other AF points.  
 
In the case of zoom lenses whose maximum aperture varies depending  
on the lens focal length, the AF points will be horizontal-line sensitive only  
(They will not work as cross-type points). However, with the EF28-80mm  
f/2.8-4L USM lens, cross-type AF will work with the center AF point.  
  With the EF24mm f/2.8 or EF28mm f/2.8 lens, the three AF points on the  
extreme left and right of the Area AF frame will be horizontal-line  
sensitive (They will not work as cross-type points).  
The following lenses and lens combinations have a maximum aperture of  
f/4, but cross-type focusing on 39 AF points is still possible as with lenses  
having an f/2.8 maximum aperture.  
EF17-40mm f/4L USM, EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM,  
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM + Extender EF1.4X II,  
EF200mm f/2L IS USM + Extender EF2X II,  
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM + Extender EF1.4X II,  
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM + Extender EF1.4X II  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
99  
When Autofocus Fails  
Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (the focus confirmation light <o>  
blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:  
Subjects difficult to focus  
  Very low-contrast subjects  
(Example: Blue sky, solid-color walls, etc.)  
  Subjects in very low light  
  Extremely backlit or reflective subjects  
(Example: Car with a highly reflective body, etc.)  
  Near and far subjects covered by an AF point  
(Example: Animal in a cage, etc.)  
  Repetitive patterns  
(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)  
In such cases, do one of the following:  
(1) With One-Shot AF (p.95), focus an objct at the same distance  
as the subject and lock the focfore recomposing.  
(2) Set the lens focus mode sh t<MF> and focus manually.  
MF: Manual Focusing  
Set the lens focus mode switch to  
<MF>.  
1
2
Focus the subject.  
  Focus by turning the lens focusing  
ring until the subject looks sharp in  
the viewfinder.  
During automatic AF point selection (p.97), if you hold down the shutter  
button halfway and focus manually, the focus confirmation light <o> will  
light when the center AF point achieves focus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100  
R: Selecting the Drive Mode  
Press the <o> button.  
(9)  
1
2
Select the drive mode.  
  While looking at the top LCD panel,  
turn the <5> dial.  
u
: Single shooting  
When you press the shutter button completely, one shot will be  
taken.  
o: High-speed continuous shong (Max. 10 shots per sec.)  
p: Low-speed continuous shog (Max. 3 shots per sec.)  
In the o and p mthe camera will shoot continuously  
while you hold dwn the ter button completely.  
k : 10-sec. self-time
l : 2-sec. self-timer  
See the next page for the self-timer operation procedure.  
6
: Silent single shooting  
The shooting sound for single shooting is quieter than <u>. The  
internal mechanical operation is not executed until you return the  
shutter button to its halfway position.  
  When the battery level is low, the drive mode icon <o/p/u> will  
blink. If the <o> icon blinks, the continuous shooting speed will  
decrease slightly.  
  In the AI Servo AF mode, the continuous shooting speed may become  
slightly slower depending on the subject and the lens used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
101  
j Using the Self-timer  
Press the <o> button.  
(9)  
1
2
Select either <k> or <l>.  
 
Look at the top LCD panel and turn the  
> dial to select < > or < >.  
<
5
k
l
k : 10-sec. self-timer  
l: 2-sec. self-timer  
Take the picture.  
3
  Look through the viewfinder, focus  
the subject, then press the shutter  
button completely.  
X
The self-timer lamp will blink, and 10 sec.  
or 2 sec. latethe picture will be taken.  
X The tLCD panel counts down the  
secountil the picture is taken.  
X
lamp’s blinking will become faster  
econds before the picture is taken.  
 
If you will not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button,  
close the eyepiece shutter before shooting (p.117). If stray light enters the  
viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.  
  Do not stand in front of the camera when you press the shutter button to  
start the self-timer. Doing so prevents the camera from focusing the  
subject.  
  Use a tripod when using the self-timer.  
  The <l> 2-sec. self-timer enables you to shoot while not touching the  
camera mounted on a tripod. This prevents camera shake while you  
shoot still lifes or bulb exposures.  
  To cancel the self-timer after it starts, set the power switch to <2>.  
  When using the self-timer for self-portraits, use focus lock for an object at  
about the same distance as where you will be (p.95).  
  After taking self-timer shots, you should check the image for proper focus  
and exposure (p.156).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
102  
Exposure Control  
Select the shooting mode to suit e subject or shooting  
objective. You can set the shuttepeed and/or aperture  
to obtain the exposure yot.  
Also, with an EX-seres Spte, you can take flash  
pictures as easily as shooting without flash.  
First set the power switch to <J>.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
103  
q Selecting the Metering Mode  
You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.  
Press the <Q> button. (9)  
1
Select the metering mode.  
2
  While looking at the top LCD panel,  
turn the <6> dial.  
q: Evaluative metering  
w: Partial metering  
r: Spot metering  
e: Center-weighted average metering  
q Evaluative metering  
This is a general-purpose metering mode suited  
even for backlit subjects. he camera sets the  
exposure automay to uit the scene.  
w Partial ring  
Effectivwhen the background is much brighter than the  
subject due to backlighting, etc. The metering is weighted at  
the center covering approx. 13.5% of the viewfinder area.  
r Spot metering  
This is for metering a specific spot of the subject or  
scene. The metering is weighted at the center  
covering approx. 3.8% of the viewfinder area.  
e Center-weighted average metering  
The metering is weighted at the center and then  
averaged for the entire scene.  
When [8C.Fn I -7: Spot meter. link to AF point] is set to [1: Enable (use  
active AF point)] (p.210), spot metering can be linked to the AF points.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
104  
q Selecting the Metering Mode  
Multi-Spot Metering  
With multiple spot meter readings, you can see the relative exposure  
levels of multiple areas in the picture and set the exposure to obtain the  
desired result.  
1 Set the metering mode to r spot metering.  
2 Press the <I> button. (8)  
  Aim the spot metering circle over the area where you want a  
relative exposure reading, then press the <I> button.  
X On the right of the viewfinder, the relative exposure level will be  
displayed for the spot meter reading taken. For the exposure, the  
average of the spot meter readings will be set.  
  While referring to the exposure level indicator’s three spot metering  
marks, you can set the exposure compensation to set the final  
exposure and obtain the desired result.  
  You can take up to eight spot meter readings for one picture.  
  The exposure setting obtained with multi-spot meter readings will be  
canceled in the following cases:  
• After taking the last spot meter reading, 16 seconds elapsed.  
You pressed the <W>, <o>, <Q>, <Z>, <S>, or  
<O> button.  
• After taking the picture, when metering timer expires.  
  When [8C.Fn I -7: Spot meter. link to AF point] is set to [1: Enable  
(use active AF point)] (p.210), multi-spot metering is still possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
d: Program AE  
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit  
the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.  
* <d> stands for Program.  
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.  
Set the shooting mode to <d>.  
1
  Press the <W> button and turn  
the <6/5> dial to select <d>.  
Focus the subject.  
2
 
Look ugh the viewfinder and aim  
selcted AF point over the subject.  
press the shutter button halfway.  
X The AF point which achieves focus  
flashes in red, and the focus  
confirmation light <o> in the  
viewfinder’s bottom right lights. (in  
One-Shot AF mode)  
X The shutter speed and aperture will  
be set automatically and displayed in  
the viewfinder and on the top LCD  
panel.  
Check the shutter speed and  
3 aperture display.  
  A correct exposure will be obtained  
as long as the shutter speed and  
aperture display do not blink.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
106  
d: Program AE  
Take the picture.  
  Compose the shot and press the  
4
shutter button completely.  
  If the “30"” stter seed and the maximum  
aperture bliindicaes underexposure.  
Incree IO speed or use flash.  
  If the “” shutter speed and the minimum  
apeure blink, it indicates overexposure.  
Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold  
separately) to reduce the amount of light entering  
the lens.  
During automatic AF point selection (p.97) or manual AF point selection with  
expanded AF points (p.222), multiple AF points might light up  
simultaneously.  
About Program Shift  
  In the Program AE mode, you can freely change the shutter speed and  
aperture combination (Program) set automatically by the camera while  
maintaining the same exposure. This is called Program shift.  
  To do this, press the shutter button down halfway, then turn the <6>  
dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture value is displayed.  
  Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture is taken.  
  Program shift is not possible with flash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
s: Shutter-Priority AE  
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically  
sets the aperture to obtain the correct exposure suiting the brightness of  
the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster shutter speed can  
freeze the action or moving subject. Or a slower shutter speed can  
create a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion.  
* <s> stands for Time value.  
Blurred motion  
Frozen action  
(Slow shutter speed)  
(Fasshutter speed)  
Set the ooting mode to <s>.  
  s the <W> button and turn  
6/5> dial to select <s>.  
1
Set the desired shutter speed.  
  While looking at the top LCD panel,  
turn the <6> dial.  
2
Focus the subject.  
  Press the shutter button halfway.  
X The aperture is set automatically.  
3
Check the viewfinder display and  
4 shoot.  
  As long as the aperture is not  
blinking, the exposure will be correct.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
108  
s: Shutter-Priority AE  
  If the maximum aperture blinks, it indicates  
underexposure.  
Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter  
speed until the aperture stops blinking or  
set a higher ISO speed.  
  If the minimum aperture blinks, it indicates  
overexposure.  
Turn the <6> dial to set a faster shutter  
speed until the aperture stops blinking or  
set a lower ISO speed.  
Shutter Speed Display  
The shutter speeds from “8000” to “4ndicathe denominator of the  
fractional shutter speed. For exampl5” incates 1/125 sec. Also, “0"5”  
indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"” iec.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
f: Aperture-Priority AE  
In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the  
shutter speed automatically to obtain the correct exposure suiting the  
subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher f/  
number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and  
background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower f/  
number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and  
background fall within acceptable focus.  
* <f> stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).  
Blurred background  
(With a large aperture opening)  
Shforeround and background  
(a smll aperture opening)  
See shooting mode to <f>.  
  Press the <W> button and turn  
the <6/5> dial to select <f>.  
1
Set the desired aperture.  
  While looking at the top LCD panel,  
turn the <6> dial.  
2
Focus the subject.  
  Press the shutter button halfway.  
3
X
The shutter speed is set automatically.  
Check the viewfinder display and  
4 shoot.  
  As long as the shutter speed is not  
blinking, the exposure will be correct.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110  
f: Aperture-Priority AE  
  If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates  
underexposure.  
Turn the <6> dial to set a larger aperture  
(lower f/number) until the shutter speed  
blinking stops or set a higher ISO speed.  
  If the “8000” shutter speed blinks, it  
indicates overexposure.  
Turn the <6> dial to set a smaller  
aperture (higher f/number) until the shutter  
speed blinking stops or set a lower ISO  
speed.  
Aperture Display  
The higher the f/number, the smaller the apure opening will be. The  
apertures displayed will differ depenon the lens. If no lens is attached to  
the camera, “00” will be displfor e aperture.  
Depth-of-Field Preview  
Press the depth-of-field preview button  
to stop down the lens to the current  
aperture setting. You can check the  
depth of field (range of acceptable focus)  
through the viewfinder.  
  A higher f/number will make more of the foreground and background fall  
within acceptable focus. However, the viewfinder will look darker.  
  If the depth of field is difficult to discern, hold down the depth-of-field  
preview button while turning the <6> dial. The depth of field can be  
clearly seen with the Live View image (p.126).  
  The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while the depth-of-field preview  
button is pressed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
111  
a: Manual Exposure  
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To  
determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the  
viewfinder or use a commercially-available exposure meter. This  
method is called manual exposure.  
* <a> stands for Manual.  
Set the shooting mode to <a>.  
1
  Press the <W> button and turn  
the <6/5> dial to select <a>.  
Shutter speed  
Set the shutter speed and  
2 aperture.  
Aperture  
 
To set the shutter speed, turn the <6>  
dial while looking at the top LCD panel.  
  To set the aerture, set the power  
switch to <> and turn the <5> dial  
whilking at the top LCD panel.  
 
caalso set it by pressing the <  
O>  
n, then turning the <6/5> dial.  
Focus the subject.  
  Press the shutter button halfway.  
3
X
 
The exposure setting will be displayed.  
On the right of the viewfinder, the  
exposure level indicator <  
the current exposure level relative to  
the standard exposure index < >.  
s> indicates  
a
Set the exposure.  
  Check the exposure level and set the  
4
5
desired shutter speed and aperture.  
Take the picture.  
If [8C.Fn II -4: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.81) is set to a setting other  
than [3: Disable], the image may still look bright even if a darker exposure  
has been set.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
112  
O Exposure Compensation  
Exposure compensation can increase (brighter) or decrease (darker)  
the standard exposure set by the camera.  
You can set the exposure compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop  
increments.  
Exposure compensation can be set in the <d/s/f> shooting modes.  
Check the exposure.  
  Press the shutter button halfway and  
1
check the exposure level indicator.  
Set the exposure compensation  
2 amount.  
Increased exposure  
  Set the power switch to <J>, and  
while looking at the viewfinder or top  
LCD panel, turn the <5> dial.  
 
Turn the
sr buttn halfway or within (  
aftepressing the shutter button halfway.  
5> dial while pressing the  
9
)
Decreased exposure  
hen exposure compensation has  
been set, the <y> icon will be  
displayed in the viewfinder.  
 
To cancel exposure compensation, set the  
exposure level indicator < > to the  
standard exposure index (< > or <C>).  
s
a
Take the picture.  
3
If [8C.Fn II -4: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.81) is set to a setting other  
than [3: Disable], the image may still look bright even if the exposure  
compensation is decreased.  
  The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you  
set the power switch to <2>.  
 
Be careful not to turn the <  
inadvertently. To prevent this, set the power switch to <  
You can also set it by pressing the < > button and turning the <6/5> dial.  
5
> dial and change the exposure compensation  
1>.  
 
O
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
113  
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)  
By changing the shutter speed or aperture automatically, the camera  
brackets the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three  
successive shots. This is called AEB.  
* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.  
Hold down the <W> and  
<o> buttons  
simultaneously. (9)  
1
X The <h> icon and “0.0” will appear  
on the top LCD panel.  
Set the AEB amount.  
2
  Turn the <6/5> dial to set the  
AEB amount.  
  1.0” is the EB increment, and <N>  
is the AEB mount.  
Tthe picture.  
3
 
e current drive mode, the pictures  
will be taken in this sequence:  
Standard exposure, decreased  
exposure, and increased exposure.  
After the three bracketed shots are taken,  
AEB will not be canceled. To cancel AEB,  
set the AEB increment to “0.0”.  
Standard Decreased Increased  
exposure exposure  
 
exposure  
  During AEB shooting, the <w> icon in the viewfinder and the <h> icon  
on the top LCD panel will blink.  
  The AEB setting will be canceled automatically if the power switch is set  
to <2> or if the flash is ready.  
  AEB will not work with bulb exposures nor with flash.  
 
If the drive mode is set to <  
three times. If < > or <  
button completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken continuously.  
Then the camera will stop shooting. When < > or < > is set, the three  
bracketed shots will be taken continuously after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.  
  AEB can also be combined with exposure compensation.  
u
> or <  
6>, you must press the shutter button  
o
p
> is set and you hold down the shutter  
k
l
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114  
AAE Lock  
Use AE lock when the area of focus is to be different from the exposure  
metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same  
exposure setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then  
recompose and take the shot. This is called AE lock. It is effective for  
backlit subjects.  
Focus the subject.  
  Press the shutter button halfway.  
1
X
The exposure setting will be displayed.  
Press the <w> button. (9)  
2
X The <w> icon will light in the  
viewfinder and the exposure setting  
will be locked (AE lock).  
  Each time you press the <A> button,  
it locks te current auto exposure  
sg.  
ompose and take the picture.  
3
he exposure level indicator on the  
right of the viewfinder will show the  
AE lock exposure level and the  
current exposure level in real-time.  
  If you want to maintain the AE lock  
while taking more shots, hold down  
the <A> button and press the shutter  
button to take another shot.  
AE Lock Effects  
Metering  
Mode  
(p.104)  
AF Point Selection Method (p.97)  
Automatic Selection Manual Selection  
AE lock is applied at the AF  
point that achieved focus.  
AE lock is applied at the  
selected AF point.  
q*  
wre AE lock is applied at the center AF point.  
* When the lens’ focus mode switch is set to <g>, AE lock is applied at the  
center AF point.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
115  
Bulb Exposures  
When bulb is set, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the  
shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter  
button. This is called bulb exposure. Use bulb exposures for night  
scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects requiring long  
exposures.  
Set the shooting mode to <buLb>.  
  Press the <W> button and turn  
1
the <6/5> dial to select <buLb>.  
Set the desired aperture.  
2
  While looking at the top LCD panel,  
turn the <6/5> dial.  
Take the picture.  
(1)  
(3)  
(2)  
3
  Press the sutter button completely.  
X The psed exposure time will be  
displd on the top LCD panel.  
in.2: sec., 3: hour  
Since bulb exposures produce more noise than usual, the image might look  
a little grainy.  
  When [8C.Fn II -1: Long exp. noise reduction] is set to [1: Auto] or  
[2: On], noise generated by the bulb exposure can be reduced (p.214).  
  For bulb exposures, using the Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer Remote  
Controller TC-80N3 (both sold separately) is recommended.  
ULCD Panel Illumination  
Press the <U> button to turn on (9)/  
off the illumination of the top/rear LCD  
panel.  
During a bulb exposure, pressing the  
shutter button completely will turn off the  
LCD panel illumination.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116  
Bulb Exposures  
Using the Eyepiece Shutter  
If you take a picture without looking at  
the viewfinder, light entering the  
eyepiece can throw off the exposure. To  
prevent this, slide the eyepiece shutter  
lever as shown by the arrow to shutter  
the eyepiece.  
You need not shutter the eyepiece during  
Live View shooting or movie shooting.  
Connecting the Remote Switch  
You can connect Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer Remote Controller  
TC-80N3 (both sold separately) or any EOaccessory equipped with  
an N3-type terminal to the camera shoowith it.  
To operate the accessory, refits nstruction manual.  
en the terminal cover.  
1
  Open the upper terminal cover.  
Connect the plug to the remote  
2 control terminal.  
  Connect the plug as shown in the  
illustration.  
  To disconnect the plug, grasp the  
plug’s silver part and pull out.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
117  
2 Mirror Lockup  
Although using the self-timer or Remote Switch can prevent camera  
shake, using mirror lockup to prevent camera vibrations (mirror shock)  
can also help when you use a super telephoto lens or shoot close ups  
(macro photography).  
When [8C.Fn III -17: Mirror lockup] is set to [1: Enable] or [2:  
Enable: Down with SET] (p.226), shooting with mirror lockup is  
possible.  
1 Focus the subject, press the shutter button completely  
and let go of it.  
X The mirror will lockup and <2> will blink on the top LCD panel.  
2 Press the shutter button completely again.  
X The picture will be taken.  
 
With [1] set, the mirror will go back down when the picture is taken.  
  With [2] set, the mirror lockup wmain even after the picture is  
taken. To cancel the mirrokupress <0>.  
  In very bright light sucas at thch or a ski slope on a sunny day,  
take the picture promptaftemirror lockup.  
  During mirror lockup, do not point the camera lens at the sun. The sun’s  
heat can scorch and damage the shutter curtains.  
  If you use bulb exposures, the self-timer, and mirror lockup in  
combination, keep pressing the shutter button completely (self-timer  
delay time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter button  
during the self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release sound but  
no picture is actually taken.  
  When [1: Enable] is set, single shooting will take effect even if the drive  
mode is set to continuous. When [2: Enable: Down with SET] is set, the  
current drive mode will take effect for the shooting.  
  When the self-timer is set to <k> or <l>, the picture will be taken  
after 10 sec. or 2 sec. respectively.  
 
The mirror locks up, and after 30 seconds, it will go back down automatically.  
Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the mirror again.  
  For mirror lockup shots, using the Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer  
Remote Controller TC-80N3 (both sold separately) is recommended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118  
DFlash Photography  
EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites  
An EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) makes flash photography as  
easy as shooting without flash.  
For detailed instructions, see the EX-series Speedlite’s instruction  
manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all the features  
of EX-series Speedlites.  
To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions with the camera’s  
menu, see pages 121-124.  
Shoe-mount Speedlites  
  FE lock  
Macro Lites  
This enables you to attain a per flash exposure for a specific part  
of the subject. Aim the viewfinder center over the subject, then press  
the <I> button and take the picture.  
  Flash exposure compensation  
In the same way as normal exposure compensation, you can set  
exposure compensation for flash. You can set flash exposure  
compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.  
Press the camera’s <Q> button, then turn the <5> dial while  
looking at the top LCD panel or viewfinder.  
If [8C.Fn II -4: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.81) is set to a setting other  
than [3: Disable], the image may still look bright even if a darker flash  
exposure has been set.  
If the camera has difficulty autofocusing, the EOS-dedicated, external  
Speedlite may automatically emit the AF-assist beam.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
DFlash Photography  
Using Non-EX-series Canon Speedlites  
  With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set in TTL or A-TTL  
autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.  
Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> (manual exposure) or  
<f> (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before  
shooting.  
  When using a Speedlite which has manual flash mode, shoot in the  
manual flash mode.  
Using Non-Canon Flash Units  
Sync Speed  
The camera can synchronize with compact, non-Canon flash units at 1/300  
sec. or 1/250 sec. or slower. With large studio flsh units, since the flash  
duration is longer than compact flash units, set te sync speed within 1/125  
sec. to 1/30 sec. Be sure to test the flash chroization before shooting.  
PC Terminal  
  The camera’s PC terminal can be  
used with flash units having a sync  
cord. The PC terminal is threaded to  
prevent inadvertent disconnection.  
  The camera’s PC terminal has no  
polarity. You can connect any sync  
cord regardless of its polarity.  
  If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to  
another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and  
malfunction may result.  
 
Do not connect to the camera’s PC terminal any flash unit requiring 250 V  
or more.  
  Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It might  
not fire.  
A flash unit attached to the camera’s hot shoe and a flash unit connected to  
the PC terminal can both be used at the same time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120  
3Setting the Flash  
When an EX-series Speedlite (such as the 580EX II, 430EX II, and  
270EX) settable by the camera is attached, you can use the camera’s  
menu screen to set the Speedlite’s flash function settings and Custom  
Functions. First attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn on the  
Speedlite.  
Setting Flash Functions  
Select [External Speedlite  
control].  
  Under the [2] tab, select [External  
Speedlite control], then press <0>.  
1
Select [Flsh function settings].  
2
  Tthe <5> dial to select [Flash  
untion settings], then press <0>.  
Set the flash function settings.  
3
  Turn the <5> dial to select a flash  
function and set it as desired.  
  The procedure is the same as setting  
a menu function.  
  If you press the <B> button in step 3, you can revert the settings to  
the default.  
  With an EX-series Speedlite not settable with the camera, only [Flash  
exp. comp], [E-TTL II], and [Flash firing] are settable under [Flash  
function settings].  
(Certain EX-series Speedlites also enable [Shutter sync.] to be set.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
121  
3Setting the Flash  
Functions settable under [Flash function settings]  
On the screen, the settable functions and what’s displayed will  
differ depending on the Speedlite, current flash mode, flash  
Custom Function settings, etc.  
To see which functions your Speedlite provides, refer to the Speedlite’s  
instruction manual.  
  Flash mode  
With an external Speedlite, you can select the flash mode to suit  
your flash shooting.  
  [E-TTL II] is the standard mode of  
EX-series Speedlites for automatic  
flash shooting.  
  [Manual flash] is for users who want  
to set the [Fash output] (1/1 to 1/  
128) temseves.  
  [MULlash] is for users who want  
et the [Flash output],  
quency], and [Flash count]  
themselves.  
 
For [TTL], [AutoExtFlash], and  
Man.ExtFlash], refer to the instruction  
[
manual of the Speedlites which  
provide the respective flash mode.  
  Shutter sync.  
Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so that the flash fires immediately  
after the exposure starts.  
If [2nd curtain] is set, the flash will fire right before the shutter closes.  
When this is combined with a slow sync speed, you can create a trail  
of light such as from car headlights at night. With 2nd curtain sync,  
two flashes will be fired: Once when you press the shutter button  
completely, and once immediately before the exposure ends.  
If [Hi-speed] is set, the flash can be used with all shutter speeds.  
This is especially effective for portraits using fill flash when you want  
to give priority to the aperture setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122  
3Setting the Flash  
  FEB  
While the flash output is changed automatically, three flash shots are  
taken. For details, see the instructions for FEB (Flash Exposure  
Bracketing) in your Speedlite’s instruction manual.  
  Flash exposure compensation  
The same setting as “Flash exposure compensation” on page 119  
can be done.  
  E-TTL II  
For normal flash exposures, set it to [Evaluative].  
If [Average] is set, the flash exposure will be averaged for the entire  
metered scene as with an external metering flash. Since flash  
exposure compensation may be necessary depending on the scene,  
this setting is for advanced users.  
  Zoom  
You can adjust the Speedlite’s flash corage. Normally, set this to  
[Auto] so that the camera will auaticaly set the flash coverage to  
match the lens focal lengt
  Wireless setting  
Wireless flash (with multile flash units) is possible. For details, see  
your Speedlite’s instruction manual about wireless flash.  
  Flash firing  
To enable flash photography, set [Enable]. To enable only the AF-  
assist beam to be emitted, set [Disable].  
When using 2nd-curtain sync, set the shutter speed to 1/50 sec. or slower. If  
the shutter speed is 1/60 sec. or faster, 1st-curtain sync will be applied even  
if [2nd curtain] is set.  
  If flash exposure compensation has already been set with the Speedlite,  
you cannot use the camera’s <Q> button or Flash function settings  
menu to set flash exposure compensation. If it is set with both the  
camera and Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting overrides the camera’s.  
  The flash function’s [E-TTL II] setting will work together with C.Fn II -5  
(p.215). And [Flash firing] will work with C.Fn II -7 (p.216).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
123  
3Setting the Flash  
Flash C.Fn Settings  
1 Select [Flash C.Fn settings].  
 
Turn the <5> dial to select [Flash C.Fn settings], then press <0>.  
2 Set the flash function.  
 
Turn the <5> dial to select the function number, then set the function. The  
procedure is the same as setting the camera’s Custom Functions (p.204).  
Canceling Speedlite Custom Function Settings  
In step 1, select [Clear all Speedlite C.Fn’s] to clear all the Speedlite’s  
Custom Function settings (except [C.Fn -0: Distance indicator display]).  
If you use an EX-series Speedlite and the SpeedliCustom Function’s [Flash  
metering mode] is set to [TTL], the flash will alys be fired at full output.  
Metered Manual FlasExpose  
This is for close-up flash phtogaphy when you want to set the flash level  
manually. Use an 18% gray card and an EX-series Speedlite which has  
manual flash mode. Follow the instructions below:  
1. Set the camera and Speedlite settings.  
• Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> or <f>.  
• Set the Speedlite to manual flash mode.  
2. Focus the subject.  
• Focus manually.  
3. Set up the 18% gray card.  
• Place the gray card at the subject’s position.  
• In the viewfinder, the entire spot metering circle at the center should  
cover the gray card.  
4. Press the <I> button. (8)  
5. Set the flash exposure level.  
Adjust the Speedlite’s manual flash level and the camera aperture so  
that the flash exposure level aligns with the standard exposure index.  
6. Take the picture.  
• Remove the gray card and take the picture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124  
Live View Shooting  
You can shoot while viewing the age on the camera’s  
LCD monitor. This is called “Liview shooting.”  
Live View shooting is effectr still subjects which do  
not move.  
If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the  
LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images.  
Using a tripod is recommended.  
About Remote Live View Shooting  
With EOS Utility (provided software) installed in your computer, you  
can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely while  
viewing the computer screen. For details, see the Software  
Instruction Manual in the CD-ROM.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
125  
zPreparing for Live View Shooting  
This sets the camera for Live View shooting of still photos. To shoot  
movies, see page 141.  
Select [Live View/Movie func.  
set.].  
  Under the [6] tab, select [Live View/  
Movie func. set.], then press <0>.  
1
Select [LV z/k set.].  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select [LV z/  
k set.], then press <0>.  
  “LV” stands for Live View.  
St [tills].  
  the <5> dial to select [Stills],  
3
then press <0>.  
Exit the menu.  
  Press the <M> button or press  
4
the shutter button halfway to turn off  
the menu screen.  
Display the Live View image.  
  Press <0>.  
X The Live View image will appear on  
the LCD monitor.  
5
  The displayed image brightness will  
be close to the actual brightness of  
the resulting image.  
 
If the standard exposure has not been  
obtained, turn the <6/5> dial.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126  
zLive View Shooting  
Select the shooting mode.  
1
2
3
  Press the <W> button and turn  
the <6/5> dial to select the  
shooting mode.  
Focus the subject.  
  Before shooting, focus with AF or  
manual focus (p.131-138).  
  When you press the shutter button  
halfway, the camera will focus with  
the current AF mode.  
Take he pcture.  
  Prs the shutter button completely.  
he picture will be taken and the captured  
mage is displayed on the LCD monitor.  
X After the image review ends, the  
camera will return to Live View  
shooting automatically.  
  Press <0> to end the Live View  
shooting.  
  During Live View shooting, do not point the lens toward the sun. The  
sun’s heat can damage the camera’s internal components.  
  Cautions for using Live View shooting are on pages 139-140.  
  You can also focus by pressing the <p> button.  
  The image’s field of view is approx. 100%.  
  When you press the shutter button completely, the shutter will sound like  
two shots have been taken, but only one shot will be taken. For flash  
shots, the reflex mirror and shutter will also make multiple sounds, but  
only one shot will be taken. During continuous shooting, only the first  
shot will make two shutter sounds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
127  
zLive View Shooting  
B About the Information Display  
 
Each time you press the <  
B
> button, the information display will change.  
AF point (d)  
Image size  
Histogram  
AEB  
White balance  
Picture Style  
FEB  
Auto Lighting  
Optimizer  
g: Exposure  
simulation  
E: Standard  
brightness  
: Standard  
: Low  
: Strong  
: Disable  
Battery check  
Highlight tone priority  
AE lock  
Shutter speed  
Flash-ready  
Aperture  
SO speed  
Shotremaining  
ash exposure compensation  
AF mode  
d: Live mode  
c : Face detection Live mode  
Drive mode  
Exposure level indicator  
Upper indicator: Exposure level/AEB range  
f: Quick mode  
Lower indicator: Flash exposure level/FEB range  
  The histogram can be displayed when [Expo. simulation: Enable]  
(p.130) has been set.  
  By setting [8C.Fn IV -15: Add aspect ratio information] to setting 1 to  
6, you can shoot with the same framing as with a medium- or large-  
format film camera such as 6x6cm, 6x4.5cm, and 4x5 inch. Vertical lines  
matching the set aspect ratio will be displayed (p.234).  
  When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image  
brightness is close to what the captured image will look like.  
  If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is not being  
displayed at the suitable brightness due to low or bright light conditions.  
However, the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting.  
  If flash is used or bulb is set, the <g> icon and histogram will be  
grayed out (for your reference). The histogram might not be properly  
displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128  
Shooting Function Settings  
As with normal shooting through the viewfinder, while the Live View  
image is displayed, you can still use the camera buttons to change  
settings and playback images.  
  Pressing the <W> <o>  
<y> <Z> <O> <A> button will  
display the setting screen on the LCD  
monitor. To change the setting, turn  
the <6> or <5> dial.  
  When you press the <B> button, turn the <6> dial to set the  
card and turn the <5> dial to set the image size or white balance  
while looking at the rear LCD panel.  
 
The metering mode is fixed to evaluative metering for Live View shooting.  
  Pressing the <A> button will lock the exposure for 16 sec.  
  To check the depth of field, press the dpth-of-field preview button.  
  During continuous shooting, the posue set for the first shot will  
also be applied to subsequent shs.  
Possible Shots During Live Shooting  
Temperature  
At 23°C / 73°F  
At 0°C / 32°F  
Possible shots  
Approx. 270  
Approx. 230  
  The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E4 and CIPA  
(Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.  
  Continuous Live View shooting is possible for approx. 3 hr. at 23°C/73°F or  
2 hr. 50 min. at 0°C/32°F (with fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E4).  
  Even during the Live View image display, image playback is possible by  
pressing <x>.  
  If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn  
off automatically as set with [5 Auto power off] (p.52). If [5 Auto  
power off] is set to [Off], the Live View shooting will stop automatically  
after approx. 30 min. (camera power remains on).  
 
You can also autofocus by pressing the release button halfway on Remote  
Switch RS-80N3 or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (both sold separately).  
  With the stereo AV cable (provided) or HDMI cable (sold separately), the  
Live View image can be displayed on a TV (p.170-171).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
3Menu Function Settings  
During the Live View display, you can still set the menu options. Live  
View functions are listed below.  
Under the [6] tab with the [Live View/  
Movie func. set.] screen, you can set  
the following functions.  
  AF mode (p.131-137)  
You can select [Live mode], [u Live mode], or [Quick mode].  
  Grid display  
With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you can dsplay grid lines. You can  
check the camera tilt before shooting
  Exposure simulation  
• Enable (g)  
The displayed image brightnwill be close to the actual  
brightness (exposure) of thresulting image. If you set exposure  
compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly.  
• Disable (E)  
The image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live  
View image easy to see.  
  Metering timer  
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock  
time).  
If you select [1 Custom WB regist.], [2 Dust Delete Data], [7 Save/  
load settings on media], [7 Regist/apply basic settings], [7 Sensor  
cleaning], [7 Clear all camera settings], or [7 Firmware Ver.], the Live  
View shooting will be terminated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130  
Using AF to Focus  
Selecting the AF Mode  
The AF modes available are [Live mode], [u Live mode] (face  
detection, p.132), and [Quick mode] (p.136).  
If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens focus mode switch to  
<MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.138).  
Select the AF mode.  
  While the Live View image is  
displayed, press the <o>  
button. (9)  
  Turn the <6> dial to select the AF  
mode.  
d : Live mode  
c : u Live mode  
f : Qck mode  
This can also be set with the odmenu option explained on the  
preceding page.  
Live Mode: d  
The image sensor is used to focus. Although AF is possible with the  
Live View image displayed, the AF operation will take longer than  
with the Quick mode. Also, achieving focus may be more difficult than  
with the Quick mode.  
Move the AF point.  
  Use <9> to move the AF point < >  
1
to where you want to focus.  
(It cannot go to the edges of the  
picture.)  
  If you press <9> straight down, the  
AF point will return to the image  
center.  
AF point  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
131  
Using AF to Focus  
Focus the subject.  
2
3
  Aim the AF point over the subject and  
press the shutter button halfway.  
X When focus is achieved, the AF point  
will turn green and the beeper will  
sound.  
X If focus is not achieved, the AF point  
will turn orange.  
Take the picture.  
  Check the focus and exposure, then  
press the shutter button completely to  
take the picture (p.127).  
u (Face detection) Lve Moc  
With the same AF method as thLive mode, human faces are detected  
and focused. Have the target person face the camera.  
Point the camera toward the  
subject.  
  When a face is detected, a <p>  
frame will appear over the face to be  
focused.  
1
  If multiple faces are detected, <q>  
will be displayed. Use <9> to move  
the <q> frame over the target face.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132  
Using AF to Focus  
Focus the subject.  
2
3
  Press the shutter button halfway and  
the camera will focus the face  
covered by the <p> frame.  
X When focus is achieved, the AF point  
will turn green and the beeper will  
sound.  
X If focus is not achieved, the AF point  
will turn orange.  
  If a face cannot be detected, the AF  
point < > will be displayed and AF  
will be executed at the center.  
Take the picture.  
  Check tfocus and exposure, then  
pthe shutter button completely to  
akthe picture (p.127).  
  If the focus is way off, face detection will not be possible. If the lens  
enables manual focusing even while the lens focus mode switch is set to  
<f>, turn the focusing ring to attain rough focus. The face will then be  
detected and <p> will be displayed.  
  An object other than a human face might be detected as a face.  
  Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the  
picture, too bright or too dark, titled horizontally or diagonally, or partially  
hidden.  
  The <p> focusing frame might cover only part of the face.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
Using AF to Focus  
  When you press <9> straight down, it will switch to the Live mode  
(p.131). You can tilt <9> to move the AF point. If you press <9>  
straight down again, it will switch back to u (face detection) Live mode.  
  Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the  
picture, the <p> will be grayed out. Then if you press the shutter button  
halfway, the center AF point < > will be used to focus.  
Live Mode and  
AF operation  
u
(Face Detection) Live Mode Notes  
  Focusing will take slightly longer.  
  Even when focus has been achieved, pressing the shutter button  
halfway will focus again.  
  The image brightness may change during nd after the AF  
operation.  
  If the light source changes while the View image is displayed,  
the screen might flicker and fng an be difficult. If this happens,  
stop the Live View shooting aofocus under the actual light  
source first.  
  If you press the <u> button in the Live mode, the AF point area will  
be magnified. If focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to  
the normal view and autofocus. Note that the AF speed may differ  
between the normal and magnified views.  
  If you autofocus in the Live mode’s normal view and then magnify  
the image, the focus might be off.  
  If you shoot a peripheral subject and the target subject is slightly out  
of focus, aim the center AF point over the subject to focus, then take  
the picture.  
  In the u Live mode, pressing the <u> button will not magnify the  
image.  
  The external Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134  
Using AF to Focus  
Shooting conditions which can make focusing difficult:  
  Low-contrast subjects such as the blue sky and solid-color, flat  
surfaces.  
  Subjects in low light.  
  Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the  
horizontal direction.  
  Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps  
changing.  
  Night scenes or points of light.  
  Under fluorescent lighting or when the image flickers.  
  Extremely small subjects.  
  Subjects at the edge of the picture.  
  Subjects strongly reflecting light.  
  The AF point covers both a near and faaway subject (such as an  
animal in a cage).  
  Subjects which keep moving wihe AF point and cannot keep  
still due to camera shake bjet blur.  
  A subject approaching or g away from the camera.  
  Autofocusing while he subject is way out of focus.  
  Soft focus effect is appliewith a soft focus lens.  
  A special effects filter is used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
135  
Using AF to Focus  
Quick Mode: f  
The dedicated AF sensor is used to focus in the One-Shot AF mode  
(p.95), using the same AF method as with viewfinder shooting.  
Although you can focus the target area quickly, the Live View image  
will be interrupted momentarily during the AF operation.  
Select the AF point.  
  Press the <o> button, then  
1
use <9> to select the AF point.  
  The AF point selection will change in  
the direction you tilt the <9>.  
  Pressing <9> straight down selects  
the center AF point. Pressing it  
straight down again sets it to  
autoic Apoint selection.  
  If all tperipheral AF points light up,  
maic AF point selection will take  
t.  
  If you press the <o> button  
or when (9) elapse, the AF point  
selected on the screen will be  
displayed.  
(If automatic AF point selection has  
been set, no AF point will be  
displayed.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136  
Using AF to Focus  
Focus the subject.  
2
3
  Aim the AF point over the subject and  
press the shutter button halfway.  
X The Live View image will turn off, the  
reflex mirror will go back down, and  
AF will be executed.  
X When focus is achieved, the beeper  
will sound and the AF point will be  
displayed in red. (If automatic AF  
point selection has been set, the AF  
point which achieves focus will flash  
in red.)  
AF point  
X The Live View image will  
automatially reappear.  
Magnifying frame  
e the picture.  
Check the focus and exposure, then  
press the shutter button completely to  
take the picture (p.127).  
You cannot take a picture during autofocusing. Take the picture only while  
the Live View image is displayed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
Focusing Manually  
You can magnify the image and focus precisely manually.  
Set the lens focus mode switch to  
<MF>.  
  Turn the lens focusing ring to focus  
1
roughly.  
Move the magnifying frame.  
2
  Use <9> to move the magnifying  
frame to the position where you want  
to focus.  
  Pressing <9> straight down will  
return the magnifying frame to the  
image cente.  
Magnifying frame  
Magnihe image.  
  ss he <u> button.  
X mage within the magnifying  
frame will be magnified.  
3
  Each time you press the <u> button,  
the view will change as follows:  
5x  
10x  
Normal view  
Focus manually.  
4
5
  While looking at the magnified image,  
turn the lens focusing ring to focus.  
  After achieving focus, press the <u>  
button to return to the normal view.  
AE lock  
Magnified area position  
Magnification  
Take the picture.  
  Check the focus and exposure, then  
press the shutter button to take the  
picture (p.127).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138  
Live View Shooting Cautions  
Notes About the Live View Image  
  Under low or bright light conditions, the Live View image might not reflect  
the brightness of the captured image.  
  If the light source within the image changes, the screen might flicker. If  
this happens, stop and resume the Live View shooting under the actual  
light source to be used.  
  If you point the camera in a different direction, it might throw off the Live  
View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness  
level stabilizes before shooting.  
  If there is a very bright light source in the picture, such as the sun, the  
bright area might appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual  
captured image will correctly show the bright area.  
  In low light, if you set the [6 LCD brightness] to a bright setting,  
chrominance noise may appear in the LivView image. However, the  
chrominance noise will not be recorded ihe captured image.  
  When you magnify the image, thge sarpness may look more  
pronounced than it really i
About the <E> icon and cainternal temperature increase  
  When you shoot cotinuously with the Live View function for a long  
period or in high temeraures, the camera's internal temperature may  
increase and the <E> warning icon will appear on the screen. Note that  
if you shoot with the Live View function for a long period in high  
temperatures, the <E> warning icon will appear earlier. Turn off the  
camera when not shooting images.  
  If you shoot with the Live View function while the <E> warning icon is  
displayed, the image quality of still photos may be degraded. You should  
stop Live View shooting and allow the camera to rest until the camera’s  
internal temperature decreases.  
  If Live View shooting continues while the <E> warning icon is displayed,  
the camera’s internal temperature will further increase and Live View  
shooting may stop automatically. Live View shooting will be disabled until  
the camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the camera and  
allow the camera to rest for a while.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
Live View Shooting Cautions  
Notes About the Shooting Results  
  When you shoot with the Live View function at high ISO speeds, noise  
(horizontal banding, dots of light, etc.) or irregular colors may appear.  
  When you shoot continuously with the Live View function for a long  
period, the camera’s internal temperature may increase and it can  
degrade image quality. Terminate Live View shooting when not shooting  
images.  
  Before taking a long exposure, stop Live View shooting temporarily and  
wait several minutes before shooting. This is to prevent image  
degradation.  
  When you playback an image shot at high ISO speeds, noise or irregular  
colors may appear.  
  If you take the picture during magnified view, the exposure might not  
come out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.  
During the magnified view, the shutter speend aperture will be  
displayed in red. Even if you take thure dring magnified view, the  
image will be captured in the al vw.  
Custom Function Notes  
  During Live View shoong, certain Custom Function settings will be  
disabled (p.205-207).  
  If [8C.Fn II -4: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.81) is set to a setting other  
than [3: Disable], the image may look bright even if manual exposure,  
exposure compensation, or flash exposure compensation has been set  
to make the exposure darker.  
Notes About Lenses and Flash  
  The focus preset feature on super telephoto lenses cannot be used.  
  FE lock and modeling flash will not work if an external Speedlite is used.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140  
Shooting Movies  
The Live View image can be recded o the card as a  
movie. A movie can be shot with utomatic exposure or  
manual exposure. The moecording format will be  
MOV.  
Cards which can record movies  
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with a fast  
writing/reading speed. The CF card’s speed should be 8MB/  
sec. or higher. And the SD card should be rated SD Speed  
Class 6 “  
” or higher.  
If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie might  
not be recorded properly. And if you playback a movie on a card  
having a slow reading speed, the movie might not playback properly.  
To check the card’s read/write speed, refer to the card  
manufacturer’s Web site.  
About Full HD 1080  
Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High-  
Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning  
lines).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
141  
k Preparing to Shoot Movies  
Set the camera to record the Live View image as a movie. To shoot still  
photos, see page 125.  
Select [Live View/Movie func. set.].  
1
  Under the [6] tab, select [Live View/  
Movie func. set.], then press <0>.  
Select [LV z/k set.].  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select [LV z/  
k set.], then press <0>.  
  “LV” stands for Live View.  
Select [Movies].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Movies],  
3
then press <0>.  
Set [Moe rec. size].  
4
  etails on [Movie rec. size], see  
e 151.  
Exit the menu.  
  Press the <M> button or press  
5
the shutter button halfway to turn off  
the menu screen.  
Display the Live View image.  
  Press <0>.  
X The Live View image will appear on  
6
the LCD monitor.  
 
 
A semi-transparent mask will appear  
on the top/bottom or right/left. The  
image area surrounded by the  
masking will be recorded as the movie.  
In <  
a> shooting mode, turn the  
<
6/5> dial to adjust the brightness.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142  
k Shooting Movies  
Autoexposure Shooting  
When the shooting mode is set to a shooting mode other than  
<a>, autoexposure control will take effect to fit the scene current  
brightness. Autoexposure control will be the same for all shooting  
modes.  
Set a shooting mode other than  
<a>.  
  Press the <W> button and turn  
the <6/5> dial to select a  
1
shooting mode other than <a>.  
Focus the subject.  
2
  Be shoting a movie, focus with  
AF r manual focus (p.131-138).  
hen you press the shutter button  
alfway or press the <p>  
button, the camera will focus with the  
current AF mode.  
Shooting the movie.  
3
  Press the <I> button.  
X The movie shooting will begin. While  
the movie is being shot, the “o” mark  
will be displayed on the upper right of  
the screen.  
Recording movie  
  During the movie shooting, you can  
press the <p> button to focus  
again.  
  To stop shooting the movie, press the  
<I> button again.  
Movie microphone  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
k Shooting Movies  
  During movie shooting, you can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing  
the <A> button (p.115). After applying AE lock during movie shooting,  
you can cancel it by pressing the <S> button.  
  If you set the power switch to <J> and turn the <5> dial, you can set  
the exposure compensation.  
  The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100-12800. If the  
[Highest ISO speed] is set to [H1], [H2] or [H3] in [8C.Fn I -3: Set ISO  
speed range] (p.208), the ISO speed will be set automatically within the  
expanded range up to the upper limit. However, setting the [Lowest ISO  
speed] to [L] will not expand the ISO speed range to the lower limit. Also,  
even if the ISO speed range is set to a narrower range than the default,  
the narrower range will not take effect.  
  Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the ISO speed, shutter  
speed, and aperture at the screen bottom. This is the exposure setting  
for taking a still photo (p.148). The exposure setting for movie shooting is  
not displayed. Note that the exposure settng or movie shooting may  
differ from that for still shooting.  
Manual Exposure Shootin
When the shooting mode is <a, you can manually set the ISO speed,  
shutter speed, and aperture for movie shooting.  
Set the shooting mode to <a>.  
1
  Press the <W> button and turn  
the <6/5> dial to select <a>.  
Set the ISO speed.  
2
  Press the <Z> button and look at  
the screen while turning the <6/  
5> dial to set the ISO speed.  
  For details on the ISO speed, see  
page 146.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144  
k Shooting Movies  
Set the shutter speed and  
3 aperture.  
  Press the shutter button halfway and  
check the exposure level indicator.  
  Turn the <6> dial to set the shutter  
speed within 1/30 (1/60) sec. to  
1/4000 sec.  
  If you set the power switch to <J>  
and turn the <5> dial, you can set  
the aperture.  
Focus anshoot the movie.  
4
  Thprocdure is the same as steps 2  
afor “Autoexposure Shooting”  
p.143).  
  With manual exposure shooting, AE lock and exposure compensation  
cannot be set.  
  Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not  
recommended since variations in the exposure will be recorded.  
  The shutter speed’s lower limit will change depending on the frame rate  
(p.151).  
  When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec.  
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less  
smooth the subject’s movement will look.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
k Shooting Movies  
About the ISO speed during manual exposure  
  The ISO speed can be set to [AUTO] (A) or within ISO 100-12800 in  
1/3-stop increments.  
  If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO] (A), the ISO speed will be set  
automatically within ISO 100-12800. (The [8C.Fn I -3: Set ISO  
speed range] (p.208) setting will not take effect.) Movie shooting as  
in aperture-priority AE mode (fixed aperture, standard exposure) is  
then possible.  
  If [Highest ISO speed] is set to [H1] (ISO 25600), [H2] (ISO 51200),  
or [H3] (ISO 102400) in [8C.Fn I -3: Set ISO speed range], the  
ISO speed can be set manually within the expanded range up to the  
upper limit. Also, if the ISO speed range has been set to a narrower  
range than the default, you can set the ISO speed within the  
narrower range.  
  Even if [Lowest ISO speed] has been set [L] (ISO 50) in [8C.Fn  
I -3: Set ISO speed range], [L] canbe seected when you set the  
ISO speed.  
 
If [8C.Fn II -3: Highlight tonrity] (p.215) is set to [1: Enable],  
the settable ISO speed ange will start from ISO 200.  
Notes for autoexposure and manual exposure shooting  
  The camera cannot autofocus continuously like a camcorder.  
  During movie shooting, do not point the lens toward the sun. The sun’s  
heat can damage the camera’s internal components.  
  If <Q> is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during movie  
shooting, the white balance may also change.  
  If you shoot a movie under fluorescent lighting, the movie image might  
flicker.  
  If you use a lens whose aperture changes during zooming, zooming  
during movie shooting is not recommended since changes in the  
exposure may also be recorded.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146  
k Shooting Movies  
Notes for autoexposure and manual exposure shooting  
  Even if the [5 Record func+media/folder sel.] menu option has been  
set to [Rec. separately] or [Rec. to multiple] (p.57), a movie cannot be  
recorded simultaneously to both the CF card <f> and SD card <g>. If  
[Rec. separately] or [Rec. to multiple] has been set, the movie will be  
recorded to the card which has been set for [Playback].  
  Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 153 and 154.  
  If necessary, also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages  
139 and 140.  
  Movies cannot be encrypted with Original Data Security Kit OSK-E3.  
  A single movie file will be recorded for each movie shot.  
  During movie shooting, the top, bottom, left, and right parts of the screen  
will have a semi-transparent mask. The movie will be recorded in the  
area surrounded by the mask. The sei-ansparent mask size will  
change depending on the [Movi. sizsetting (p.151).  
  The sound is recorded in monaury the camera’s built-in microphone  
(p.143).  
 
Stereo sound recoring is pe by connecting an external microphone  
equipped with a steeo mini plug (3.5mm dia.) to the camera’s external  
microphone IN terminal (p.19). Do not connect the camera’s external  
microphone IN terminal to anything other than an external microphone.  
  The sound recording level will be adjusted automatically.  
  If you playback the movie with “Shooting information display” (p.156), the  
shooting mode, shutter speed, and aperture will not be displayed. The  
image information (Exif) will record the settings used at the start of the  
movie.  
  With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E4, the total movie recording time  
will be as follows: At 23°C/73°F: Approx. 2 hr. 40 min., At 0°C/32°F:  
Approx. 2 hr. 20 min.  
  With ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser (provided software), you can  
extract a still photo from the movie. The still photo quality will be as  
follows: Approx. 2.07 megapixels at [1920x1080], approx. 920,000 pixels  
at [1280x720], and approx. 310,000 pixels at [640x480].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
k Shooting Movies  
B About the Information Display  
  Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will  
change.  
Movie shooting remaining time/Elapsed time  
Recording movie  
Still photo image size  
White balance  
Picture Style  
AF point  
(d)  
Auto Lighting  
Optimizer  
: Standard  
: Low  
: Strong  
: Disable  
F: Movie  
display  
Movie-recording size  
AE lock  
Battery check  
Highlight tone priority  
ISO speed  
Frame rate  
Shutter speed  
Shots remaining  
Aperture  
AF mode  
Drive mode  
d: Live mode  
c : Face detection Live  
mode  
Exposure level  
f: Quick mode  
  If there is no card in the camera, the movie shooting remaining time will  
be displayed in red.  
  When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will  
change to the elapsed time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148  
k Shooting Movies  
Taking Still Photos During Movie Shooting  
You can take a still photo at anytime by  
pressing the shutter button completely,  
even during movie shooting.  
  The still photo will record the entire screen including the semi-  
transparent mask.  
  The still photo will be taken at the exposure setting displayed when  
you press the shutter button halfway. If a still photo is shot during  
movie shooting in manual exposure mode, the still photo will be  
taken with the exposure setting set for the movie.  
  The still photo will be taken at the imagsize, JPEG compression  
rate, and Picture Style that have en st.  
  If you take a still photo during mshooting, the movie will have a  
still moment lasting approc. The still photo will be recorded to  
the card, and the mvie showill resume automatically when the  
Live View image is dsplaed.  
  The movie and still photo will be recorded to the card as separate  
files. If you use continuous shooting, the captured still photos will be  
recorded to the card.  
  If [Record func.] (p.57) is set to [Standard] or [Auto switch media],  
the movies and still photos will be recorded to the same card. If  
[Rec. separately] or [Rec. to multiple] is set, the movies will be  
recorded to the card set for [Playback]. And the still photos will be  
recorded at the image size set for the respective card.  
  Any external Speedlite used will not fire.  
  AEB cannot be used.  
  Continuous still photo shooting is possible during movie shooting, but the  
captured images will not be displayed during the continuous shooting.  
Depending on the still photo’s image size, number of shots during  
continuous shooting, card performance, etc., the movie shooting might  
stop automatically.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
k Shooting Movies  
  For continuous shooting of still photos during movie shooting, using a  
high-speed CF card compatible with UDMA transfers is recommended.  
Setting a smaller image size for still photos and shooting fewer  
continuous still photos are also recommended.  
  If the drive mode has been set to <k> or <l> and you start shooting  
a movie, the drive mode will automatically change to <u> (single  
shooting).  
Shooting Function Settings  
As with normal shooting through the viewfinder, during movie shooting,  
you can still use the camera buttons to change function settings and  
execute playback.  
 
Presthe W  
>, <  
o>,  
> <  
A> button will display the  
ective setting screen on the LCD  
mnitor. To change the setting, turn the  
<
6> or <5> dial.  
  When you press the <B> button, turn the <6> dial to set the  
card to be used to record and turn the <5> dial to set the image  
size or white balance while looking at the rear LCD panel.  
  The metering mode will be fixed to center-weighted average  
metering for movie shooting. If the AF mode is set to [u (Face  
detection) Live mode], the exposure control will be evaluative  
metering linked to the detected face.  
  Even if the AF mode has been set to [Quick mode], it will switch to  
[Live mode] during movie shooting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150  
3Menu Function Settings  
During movie shooting, you can still set the menu options. Movie  
shooting functions are listed below.  
Under the [6] tab with the [Live View/  
Movie func. set.] screen, you can set  
the following functions.  
  AF mode (p.131-137)  
You can select [Live mode], [u Live mode], or [Quick mode].  
Note that the camera cannot focus a moving subject  
continuously.  
  Grid display  
With [Grid 1l] or [Grid 2m], you cadisplay grid lines. You can  
check the camera tilt before shog.  
  Movie-recording size  
You can select the movie’s e size [****x****] and frame rate [9]  
(frames recorded pesecond). 9(frame rate) displayed on the  
[Movie rec. size] screen switches automatically depending on the  
[6 Video system] setting.  
• Image size  
[1920x1080] : Full HD (Full High-Definition) recording quality.  
[1280x720] : HD (High-Definition) recording quality.  
[640x480]  
: Standard recording quality. The screen format  
will be 4:3.  
• Frame rate (fps: frames per second)  
[6] [8] : For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North  
America, Japan, Korea, Mexico, etc.).  
[5] [7] : For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe,  
Russia, China, Australia, etc.).  
[4]  
: Mainly for motion pictures.  
* The actual frame rate (fps) will be: 6: 29.97, 5: 25.00, 4: 23.976,  
8: 59.94, 7: 50.00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
151  
3Menu Function Settings  
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute (Approx.)  
Total Recording Time  
Movie-recording  
File Size  
Size  
4GB Card  
16GB Card  
1920x1080  
65 4  
12 min.  
49 min.  
330 MB/min.  
330 MB/min.  
165 MB/min.  
1280x720  
87  
12 min.  
24 min.  
49 min.  
640x480  
87  
1 hr. 39 min.  
  After you start shooting a movie, the movie shooting will stop automatically if  
the file size reaches 4 GB or if the movie time reaches 29 min. 59 sec. To start  
movie shooting again, press the <I> button. (A new movie file starts being  
recorded.)  
  Sound recording  
When [On] is set, the built-in microphone ll record sound in  
monaural. Stereo sound recording issiblby connecting an  
external microphone equippeh a stereo mini plug (3.5mm dia.)  
to the camera’s externamicroe IN terminal (p.19). When an  
external microphone is onnected, the sound recording will  
automatically come through the external microphone. If [Off] is set,  
sound will not be recorded.  
  Metering timer  
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock  
time).  
If you select [1 Custom WB regist.], [2 Dust Delete Data], [7 Save/  
load settings on media], [7 Regist/apply basic settings], [7 Sensor  
cleaning], [7 Clear all camera settings], or [7 Firmware Ver.], the  
movie shooting will stop.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152  
Movie Shooting Cautions  
Recording and Image Quality  
  When you shoot movies at high ISO speeds, noise (horizontal banding,  
dots of light, etc.) or irregular colors may appear.  
  If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer, the Image Stabilizer will  
operate at all times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway.  
The Image Stabilizer may cause the total movie shooting time or the  
number of possible shots to decrease. If you use a tripod or if the Image  
Stabilizer is not necessary, you should set the IS switch to <2>.  
  The camera’s built-in microphone will also pick up camera operation  
noise. If you use a commercially-available external microphone, you can  
prevent (or reduce) these noises from being recorded.  
  To autofocus again during movie shooting, press the <p> button.  
(AF will not work by pressing the shutter button halfway.) However,  
autofocusing during movie shooting is norecommended since it can  
momentarily throw the focus way off or nge the exposure.  
  If the card’s remaining capacity ienouh for movie shooting, the  
movie shooting remaining (p.8) will be displayed in red.  
  If you use a card having a ritig speed, a five-level  
indicator might appar on thht of the screen during movie  
shooting. It indicatehow much data has not yet been written  
to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer memory).  
The slower the card, the faster the indicator will climb upward.  
If the indicator becomes full, movie shooting will stop  
automatically.  
Indicator  
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will either not  
appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward. First,  
shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.  
  During movie shooting, certain Custom Function settings will be disabled  
(p.205-207).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
153  
Movie Shooting Cautions  
About the <E> icon and camera's internal temperature increase  
  When you shoot movies continuously for a long period or in high  
temperatures, the camera's internal temperature may increase and the  
<E> icon may appear on the screen. Note that if you shoot movies for a  
long period in high temperatures, the <E> icon will appear earlier. Turn  
off the camera when not shooting movies.  
  If you shoot movies while the <E> icon is displayed, the image quality of  
the movies will not be degraded. However, if you shoot still photos while  
the <E> warning icon is displayed, the image quality of still photos may  
be degraded. You should stop movie shooting and allow the camera to  
rest until the camera's internal temperature decreases.  
  If movie shooting continues while the <E> warning icon is displayed, the  
camera's internal temperature will further increase and movie shooting  
may stop automatically. Movie shooting will bdisabled until the  
camera's internal temperature decreases. Toff the camera and allow  
the camera to rest for a while.  
Playback and TV connection  
  If the brightness changes greang movie shooting, that part might  
look momentarily still when you playback the movie.  
  If the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable (p.171),  
pressing the <B> button during movie shooting will not display the  
INFO screen.  
  If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.170-171) and shoot a movie,  
the TV will not output any sound during the shooting. However, the  
sound will be properly recorded.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154  
Image Playback  
This chapter explains how to plaback and erase  
photos and movies, how to view em on a TV screen,  
and other playback-relatections.  
About images taken with another camera:  
The camera might not be able to properly display images captured  
with a different camera or edited with a computer or whose file name  
or file format was changed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
155  
xImage Playback  
Single Image Display  
1
Playback the image.  
  Press the <x> button.  
X The last captured image or last image  
viewed will appear.  
Select the image.  
2
 
To playback images starting with the last  
image, turn the < > dial counterclockwise.  
5
To playback images starting with the first  
captured image, turn the dial clockwise.  
  Each time you press the <B>  
button, the dsplay format will change.  
Single image display  
Single image display + Image size  
Shooting information display  
Histogram display  
Exit the image playback.  
3
  Press the <x> button to exit the  
image playback and return the  
camera to shooting ready.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156  
xImage Playback  
B Shooting Information Display  
FE Microadjustment  
Exposure compensation amount  
Flash exposure compensation amount  
Aperture  
Protect  
Voice memo  
Folder number - File number  
Card  
Histogram  
(Brightness/RGB)  
Shutter speed/  
Recording time  
AF  
Metering mode  
Microadjustment  
Shooting mode/  
Movie/Still photo  
Color temperature  
during movie shooting  
when <P> is set  
ISO speed  
White balance  
Image size/  
White balance  
correction  
Movie-recording format  
Movie-recording size  
Frame rate  
Shooting date and time  
AE Microadjustment  
Picture Style/Settings  
Playback number/  
Total images  
recorded  
Color space  
Highlight tone priority  
File size  
Image verification data appended  
Encryption  
* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image size, the JPEG image file size will be  
displayed.  
* For movie files, the movie icon <k>, recording format <D>, recording size  
<A/B/C>, and frame rate <8/7/6/5/4> will be displayed. The  
shooting mode, shutter speed, and aperture will not be displayed.  
* For still photos taken during movie shooting display, < > will be displayed.  
  About the Highlight Alert  
When the [4 Highlight alert] menu option is set to [Enable],  
overexposed highlight areas will blink. To obtain more image detail in  
the overexposed areas, set the exposure compensation to a  
negative amount and shoot again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
157  
xImage Playback  
  About the AF Point Display  
When the [4  
AF point disp.] menu option is set to [Enable], the AF  
point which achieved focus will be displayed in red. If automatic AF  
point selection was used, multiple AF points might be displayed in red.  
  About the Histogram  
The brightness histogram display shows the exposure level  
distribution and overall brightness. The RGB histogram display is for  
checking the color saturation and gradation. The display can be  
switched with the [4 Histogram] menu option.  
[Brightness] Display  
Sample Histograms  
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of  
the image’s brightness level. The horizontal axis  
indicates the brightness level (darker on the left and  
brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indcates  
how many pixels exist for each brightnesleveThe  
more pixels there are toward the left, thrker the  
image. And the more pixels therowrd the right,  
the brighter the image. If tere armany pixels on  
the left, the shadow detail will be lost. And if there are  
too many pixels on the right, the highlight detail will  
be lost. The gradation in-between will be reproduced.  
By checking the image and its brightness histogram,  
Dark image  
Normal brightness  
Bright image  
you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.  
[RGB] Display  
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color’s  
brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue). The horizontal  
axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on the left and brighter  
on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for  
each color brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the  
darker and less prominent the color. And the more pixels there are toward  
the right, the brighter and denser the color. If there are too many pixels on  
the left, the respective color information will be lacking. And if there are too  
many pixels on the right, the color will be too saturated with no detail. By  
checking the image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s saturation  
and gradation condition and white balance inclination.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158  
xSearching for Images Quickly  
y
Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index display)  
Search for images quickly with the index display showing four or nine  
images on one screen.  
Turn on the index display.  
1
  During image playback, press the  
<y> button.  
X The 4-image index display will  
appear. The currently-selected image  
will be highlighted in a blue frame.  
  Press the <y> button again to switch  
to the 9-image index display.  
Pressing the <u> button will toggle  
the disply from 9 images, 4 images,  
anone mage displayed.  
Î
Î
Select the image.  
  Turn the <5> dial to move the blue  
frame to select the image.  
2
  Press <0> and the selected image  
will be displayed as a single image.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
xSearching for Images Quickly  
I Jump through Images (Jump display)  
With the single image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump  
through the images.  
Select the jump method.  
1
  With the [4 Image jump w/6]  
menu option, select the desired jump  
method from [1 image/10 images/  
100 images/Date/Folder/Movies/  
Stills], then press <0>.  
Bse by jumping.  
2
  s the <x> button to playback  
the image.  
  Turn the <6> dial.  
X The jump display will proceed  
according to the selected jump  
method.  
X On the bottom right, the jump method  
and current image location are  
indicated.  
Jump method  
Image location  
  To search images according to the shooting date, select [Date]. Turn the  
<6> dial to display the shooting date.  
  To search images according to folder, select [Folder].  
  If the card has both [Movies] and [Stills], select either one to display  
only movies or stills.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160  
u/y Magnified View  
You can magnify the image by 1.5x to 10x on the LCD monitor.  
Magnify the image.  
  During image playback, press the  
1
<u> button.  
X The image will be magnified.  
 
If you hold down the <u> button, the  
image will continue to be magnified until  
it reaches the maximum magnification.  
Magnified area position  
  To reduce the magnification, press  
the <y> button. If you hold down the  
button, the magnification will continue  
to reduce to the single image display.  
Scroll around the image.  
  Use <9to scroll around the  
2
mified mage.  
To eit the magnified display, press the <  
x>  
tton and the single image display will return.  
Magnified View’s Starting Position  
Normally, the magnified view starts at the image center. When the [4  
Enlarge display] menu option is set to [Enlarge from selected AF  
point], the magnified view starts at the selected AF point. This is  
convenient for quickly checking the focus.  
  While in the magnified view, you can keep the same magnified area and  
magnification when you turn the <5> dial to view another image.  
  In the case of images shot with automatic AF point selection or with  
manual focus <g>, the magnification will start at the image center.  
  Magnified view is not possible during the image review immediately after  
the image is taken.  
  With [Enlarge from selected AF point]  
The starting magnification varies depending on the image size that was set.  
• If C.Fn III -8-1/2/3 is set, the focusing point area will be expanded and the  
magnified view starts from the AF point that actually achieved focus. Therefore,  
the view may not be magnified from the manually-selected AF point.  
  A movie cannot be magnified.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
b Rotating the Image  
You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.  
Select [Rotate].  
  Under the [3] tab, select [Rotate],  
1
then press <0>.  
Select the image.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
image to be rotated.  
  You can also select an image on the  
index display.  
Roate e image.  
3
  time you press <0>, the  
ige will rotate clockwise as follows:  
90° 270° 0°  
  To rotate another image, repeat steps  
2 and 3.  
  To exit and return to the menu, press  
the <M> button.  
  If you have set [5 Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.182) before taking  
vertical shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.  
  If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during  
image playback, set the [5 Auto rotate] menu option to [OnzD].  
  A movie cannot be rotated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162  
k Enjoying Movies  
Basically, there are the following three ways to playback the movies you  
shot.  
Playback on a TV set  
(p.170, 171)  
Use the provided stereo AV cable or  
HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately)  
to connect the camera to a TV set. You  
can then playback the captured movies  
and photos on the TV.  
If you have a High-Definition TV set and  
connect your camera to it with an HDMI  
cable, you can watch Full HD (Full High-  
Definition 1920x1080) and HD (High-  
Definition 180x720) movies with higher  
image quali.  
  Movies on a card can be pled oby devices compatible with MOV  
files.  
  Since hard disk recorders dhave an HDMI IN terminal, the camera  
cannot be connectewith an HDMI cable.  
  Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB  
cable, movies and photos cannot be played nor saved.  
Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor  
(p.165-169)  
You can playback movies on the  
camera’s LCD monitor and even edit out  
the first and last scenes. You can also  
playback the photos and movies  
recorded in the card as an automatic  
slide show.  
A movie edited with a personal computer cannot be rewritten to the card and  
played back with the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
k Enjoying Movies  
Playback and Editing with a Personal Computer  
(See the PDF file instruction manual for ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser)  
The movie files recorded in the card can  
be transferred to a personal computer  
and played or edited with ZoomBrowser  
EX/ImageBrowser (provided software).  
You can also extract a single frame from  
a movie and save it as a still photo.  
  To have the movie playback smoothly on a personal computer, the  
personal computer must be a high-performance model. Regarding the  
hardware requirements for ZoomBrowser EXmageBrowser, see the  
PDF file instruction manual.  
  If you want to use commercially-availsoftwre to playback or edit the  
movies, be sure it is compatibh MOV files. For details on  
commercially-available softwauire the software maker.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
164  
k Playing Movies  
Playback the image.  
  Press the <x> button to playback  
1
images.  
Select a movie.  
2
 
Turn the <5> dial to select an image.  
  With the single-image display, the  
<1s> icon displayed on the  
upper left indicates that it is a movie.  
 
During the index display, the perforation  
on the left edge of the image indicates that  
it is a move. Movies cannot be played  
on the inex display, so press <  
0> to  
sh to te single-image display.  
thsingle-image display,  
3 s <0>.  
X The movie playback panel will appear  
on the bottom.  
Playback the movie.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [7]  
(play), then press <0>.  
4
X The movie will start playing.  
  You can pause the movie playback by  
pressing <0>.  
  During movie playback, you can  
adjust the sound volume by turning  
the <6> dial.  
  For more details on the playback  
procedure, see the next page.  
Speaker  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
k Playing Movies  
Function  
Exit  
Playback Description  
Returns to the single-image display.  
7 Play  
Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.  
Adjust the slow motion speed by turning the <5> dial. The  
8 Slow motion  
5 First frame  
slow-motion speed is indicated on the upper right.  
Displays the movie’s first frame.  
Each time you press <0>, a single previous frame is  
3 Previous frame displayed. When you hold down <0>, it will rewind the  
movie.  
Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-by-  
6 Next frame  
frame. When you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the  
movie.  
4 Last frame  
X Edit  
Displays the movie’s last fram.  
Displays the editing screen (p67).  
Playback position  
mm’ SS”  
Playback time  
You can adjust the built-in speaker’s sound volume by  
turning th<6> dial.  
Volume  
  With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E4, the continuous playback time  
at 23°C/73°F will be as follows: Approx. 9 hr. 20 min.  
  During the single-image display, press the <B> button to switch the  
display format (p.156).  
  If you took a still photo while you shot the movie, the still photo will be  
displayed for approx. 1 sec. during the movie playback.  
  If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.170, 171) and playback a  
movie, adjust the sound volume with the TV set. Turning the <6> dial  
will not change the sound volume.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
166  
X
Editing the Movie’s First and Last Scenes  
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in 1-sec. increments.  
On the movie playback screen,  
select [X].  
X The editing screen will be displayed.  
1
Specify the parts to be edited out.  
2
  Select either [ ] (Cut beginning) or  
[
] (Cut end), then press <0>.  
 
Tilt <9> to the left or right to see the  
previous or next frames. Holding it down  
will fast forward the frames. Turn the  
<
5
> dial to browse frame-by-frame.  
After deciding which part to edit out, press  
>. Thportion highlighted in blue on  
the top of he screen is what will remain.  
 
<0  
Chethe editing.  
3
elect [7] and press <0> to playback  
he portion highlighted in blue.  
 
To change the editing, go back to step 2.  
  To cancel the editing, select [ ] and  
press <0>.  
Save the movie.  
4
  Select [ ], then press <0>.  
X The save screen will appear.  
  To save it as a new movie, select  
[New file]. Or to save it and overwrite  
the original movie file, select  
[Overwrite]. Then press <0>.  
 
Since the editing is done in 1-sec. increments (position indicated by [  
X]), the exact  
position where the movie is edited may differ slightly from the position you specified.  
  If the card does not have enough room, [New file] will not be selectable.  
  More movie editing functions are available with ZoomBrowser EX/  
ImageBrowser (provided software).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
167  
3Slide Show (Auto Playback)  
You can playback the images in the card as an automatic slide show.  
Select [Slide show].  
1
  Under the [4] tab, select [Slide  
show], then press <0>.  
Select the images to be played  
Number of images to be played  
2 back.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the item  
shown on the left, then press <0>.  
[All images/Movies/Stills]  
  Turn the <5> dial to select one of  
the fowing[jAll images/  
kMes/zStills]. Then press  
>.  
[For/Date]  
  Turn the <5> dial to select either  
[nFolder] or [iDate].  
  When <z > is highlighted,  
press the <B> button.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the folder  
or date, then press <0>.  
Item  
Playback Description  
jAll images All the still photos and movies in the card will be played back.  
Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played  
back.  
nFolder  
Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date will  
be played back.  
iDate  
kMovies  
zStills  
Only the movies in the card will be played back.  
Only the still photos in the card will be played back.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
168  
3Slide Show (Auto Playback)  
Set the play time and repeat option.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Set up],  
then press <0>.  
3
  For still photos, set the [Play time]  
and [Repeat] options, then press the  
<M> button.  
[Play time]  
[Repeat]  
Start the side show.  
  The <5> dial to select [Start],  
thepress <0>.  
fter [Loading image...] is displayed  
for a few seconds, the slide show will  
start.  
4
5
Quit the slide show.  
  To quit the slide show and return to  
the setting screen, press the  
<M> button.  
 
To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be displayed  
on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume the slide show.  
  During auto playback, you can press the <B> button to change the  
still photo display format.  
  During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the  
<6>.  
 
During pause, you can turn the <5> or <6> dial to view another image.  
  During the slide show, auto power off will not work.  
  The display time may vary depending on the image.  
  To view the slide show on a TV set, see pages 170-171.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169  
Viewing the Images on TV  
You can view the still photos and movies on a TV set. Before connecting  
or disconnecting the cable between the camera and television, turn off  
the camera and television.  
* Adjust the movie’s sound volume with the TV set. To playback movies, see page 165.  
* Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed might be cut off.  
Viewing on Non-HD (High-Definition) TV Sets  
Connect the provided AV cable to  
the camera.  
1
 
Connect the stereo AV cable to the camera’s  
q/C> terminal.  
<
  With the plug’s <Canon> logo facing  
the front of the camera, insert it into  
the <q/C> terminal.  
Connect the V cable to the TV set.  
(Red)  
2
  Connthe stereo AV cable to the  
vieo IN terminal and to the  
o IN terminal.  
(White)  
(Yellow)  
Turn on the TV and switch the TV’s video  
3 input to select the connected port.  
Set the camera’s power switch to  
4 <1>.  
Press the <x> button.  
X The image will appear on the TV  
5
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on  
the camera’s LCD monitor.)  
  If the video system format does not match the TV’s, the images will not  
be displayed properly. Set the proper video system format with [6 Video  
system].  
  Do not use any stereo AV cable other than the one provided. Images  
might not be displayed if you use a different cable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170  
Viewing the Images on TV  
Viewing on HD (High-Definition) TV Sets  
The HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is required.  
Connect the HDMI cable to the  
camera.  
  Connect the HDMI cable to the  
camera’s <D> terminal.  
  With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo  
facing the back of the camera, insert  
it into the <D> terminal.  
1
Connect the HDMI cable to the TV set.  
  Connect the HDMI cable to the TV’s  
2
HDMI IN port.  
Turn the V and switch the TV’s  
3 ideo put to select the connected port.  
the camera’s power switch to  
4 <1>.  
Press the <x> button.  
X The image will appear on the TV  
5
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on  
the camera’s LCD monitor.)  
 
The images will be displayed at the  
TV’s optimum resolution automatically.  
  By pressing the <B> button, you  
can change the display format.  
Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>  
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.  
  Some TVs might not be able to display the captured images. In such a  
case, use the stereo AV cable provided.  
  The camera’s <q/C> terminal and <D>  
terminal cannot be used at the same time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
171  
JProtecting Images  
Protecting the image prevents it from being erased accidentally.  
Protecting a Single Image  
Select the image to be protected.  
1
  Press the <x> button to playback  
images, then turn the <5> dial to  
select an image.  
Protect the image.  
2
  During image playback, press the  
<H> button.  
X When an image is protected, the  
<K> icon will appear on the top of  
the screen.  
  To cancel thimage protection, press  
the H> button again. The <K>  
n wl disappear.  
  otect another image, repeat  
sps 1 and 2.  
3Protecting All Images in a Folder or Card  
You can protect all the images in a folder or card at one time.  
When the [3 Protect images] menu  
option is set to [All images in folder] or  
[All images on card], all the images in  
the folder or card will be protected.  
To cancel the image protection, select  
[Clear all images in folder] or [Clear all  
images on card].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
172  
JProtecting Images  
 
 
If you format the card (p.50), the protected images will also be erased.  
To protect an image, press and quickly let go of the <  
H> button. If you  
hold down the button for approx. 2 sec., a voice memo will be recorded.  
  Images can also be protected individually when the [3 Protect images]  
menu option is set to [Select images]. Press <0> to protect or  
unprotect the image.  
 
Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase  
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the protection.  
  If you erase all the images (p.179), only the protected images will  
remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images  
all at once.  
  If [8C.Fn IV -9: Hbutton function] is set to [1: Record memo  
(Protect: Disabled)] or [2: Play memo (hold: Record memo)], images  
cannot be protected with the <H> button. Use the [3 Protect  
images] menu option’s [Select image] tprotect images.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
KRecording and Playing Voice Memos  
You can append a voice memo to a captured image. The voice memo will  
be saved as a WAV sound file having the same file number as the image.  
The sound can be played back with the camera or provided software.  
Recording a Voice Memo  
Select the image to which you  
1
want to append a voice memo.  
 
Press the <x> button to playback images,  
then turn the <5> dial to select the image.  
Record a voice memo.  
2
  While the image is displayed, press  
the <H> button for approx. 2 sec.  
  When [Recording memo...] appears,  
keep pressig the button and speak  
into microphone. The maximum  
ordng time for a voice memo is 30  
Voice memo microphone  
  To end the voice memo, let go of the  
button.  
X The < > icon will be displayed on  
the top of the screen.  
  You cannot append a voice memo to a protected image.  
  You cannot append a voice memo to a movie.  
  To record a voice memo longer than 30 sec., repeat step 2.  
  You can also record a voice memo once, right after image capture during  
the image review by following step 2.  
  A voice memo cannot be recorded with an external microphone.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
174  
KRecording and Playing Voice Memos  
Playing a Voice Memo  
When [8  
C.Fn IV -9:  
H
button function] is set to [2: Play memo (hold: Record  
memo)] (p.231), the voice memo appended to the image can be played back.  
Set [8C.Fn IV -9: Hbutton  
1
function] to [2: Play memo (hold:  
Record memo)].  
  Set this function while referring to  
page 231.  
  For details on setting a Custom  
Function, see page 204.  
Select the image whose voice  
2 memo you want to playback.  
 
Pres the x> button to playback images,  
thrn the <  
5> dial to select an image  
hichas the <  
> icon displayed on the top.  
yback a voice memo.  
  While the image is displayed, press  
the <H> button.  
3
X The voice memo will be played.  
  Turn the <6> dial to adjust the  
sound volume.  
  To stop playback, press the <H>  
button.  
Speaker  
  If the image has been appended with multiple voice memos, they will be  
played consecutively.  
 
 
Erasing only the voice memo appended to an image is not possible with the camera.  
If the image is erased (p.179), any appended voice memo will also be erased.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
175  
a Copying Images  
The images recorded in a card can be copied to the other card.  
3Copying Individual Images  
Select [Image copy].  
1
  Under the [3] tab, select [Image  
copy], then press <0>.  
Select [Sel.Image].  
2
  Check the copy source and target  
card’s capacity.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select  
[Sel.Ige], hen press <0>.  
Lowest file number  
Sethe folder.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the folder  
3
Number of images in folder  
containing the image to be copied,  
then press <0>.  
  Refer to the images displayed on the  
right to help you select the desired  
folder.  
X The images in the selected folder will  
be displayed.  
Folder name  
Highest file number  
The copy source is the card selected by the [5 Record func+media/folder  
sel.] menu option’s [Record/play] ([Playback]) setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
176  
a Copying Images  
Total images selected  
Select the image.  
4
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
image to be copied, then press <0>.  
X The <X> icon will appear on the  
upper left of the screen.  
 
Press the <  
three-image view. To return to the single-  
image display, press the < > button.  
y> button to display the  
u
  To select another image to be copied,  
repeat step 4.  
Press the <H> button.  
  After selecting all the images to be  
copied, press the <H> button.  
5
Sele[OK.  
Chck the target card and press  
0>.  
6
Select the target folder.  
7
  Turn the <5> dial to select the target  
folder where the images are to be  
copied to, then press <0>.  
  To create a new folder, select [Create  
folder].  
Select [OK].  
  Check the copy source and target  
card’s information.  
8
  Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],  
then press <0>.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
a Copying Images  
X The copying will start and the  
progress will be displayed.  
When the copying is completed, the  
result will be displayed. Select [OK] to  
return to the screen in step 2.  
3Copying All Images in a Folder  
In step 2, select [Sel.n]. Select the source folder to be copied, then  
the target folder.  
3Copying All Images in a Card  
In step 2, select [All image]. All the folders aimages in the source  
card will be copied to the target card. (folder numbers and file  
names will remain the same in tgefolder.)  
  The file name of the coied image will be the same as the source  
image’s file name.  
  If [Sel.Image] has been set, you cannot copy images in multiple folders  
at one time. Select images in each folder to copy them folder by folder.  
 
If an image is being copied to a target folder having the same folder number as  
the source folder and the target folder already has an image with the same file  
number, the following will be displayed: [Skip image and continue] [Replace  
existing image] [Cancel copy]. Select the copying method, then press <  
0>.  
• [Skip image and continue]:  
Any images in the source folder having the same file number as  
images in the target folder will be skipped and not copied.  
• [Replace existing image]:  
Any images in the target folder having the same file number as the  
source images (including protected images) will be overwritten.  
If an image with a print order (p.201) is overwritten, you will have to set  
the print order again.  
 
The image’s print order information will not be retained when the image is copied.  
  Shooting is not possible during the copying operation. Select [Cancel]  
before trying to shoot.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
178  
LErasing Images  
You can either select and erase images one by one or erase them in  
one batch. Protected images (p.172) will not be erased.  
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you  
no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important  
images from being erased accidentally, protect them. Erasing a  
RAW+JPEG image will erase both the RAW and JPEG images.  
Erasing a Single Image  
Playback the image to be erased.  
1
Press the <L> button.  
2
X The erase menu will appear at the  
bottom of the screen.  
Erase the mage.  
X The <5> dial to select [Erase],  
3
hepress <0>. The image  
splayed will be erased.  
3
Checkmarking <X> Images to be Erased in a Batch  
By checkmarking the images to be erased, you can erase multiple  
images at one time. With the [3 Erase images] menu option, select  
[Select and erase images]. With <0>, checkmark <X> the images to  
be erased. Then press the <L> button.  
3Erasing All Images in a Folder or Card  
You can erase all the images in a folder or card at one time. When the  
[3 Erase images] menu option is set to [All images in folder] or [All  
images on card], all the images in the folder or card will be erased.  
To also erase protected images, format the card (p.50).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
179  
Changing Image Playback Settings  
3Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness  
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to  
read.  
Select [LCD brightness].  
1
  Under the [6] tab, select [LCD  
brightness], then press <0>.  
Adjust the brightness.  
2
  While referring to the gray chart, turn  
the <5> dil, then press <0>.  
  To check the image’s exposure, looking at the histogram is  
recommended (p.158).  
  During image playback, you can press the <U> button to display the  
screen in step 2 and adjust the brightness.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
180  
Changing Image Playback Settings  
3Setting the Image Review Time  
You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor  
immediately after capture. To keep the image displayed, set [Hold]. To  
not have the image displayed, set [Off].  
Select [Review time].  
1
  Under the [2] tab, select [Review  
time], then press <0>.  
Set the desired time.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
option, then press <0>.  
If [Hold] is set, the image will be displayed until the auto power off time  
elapses.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
Changing Image Playback Settings  
3Auto Rotation of Vertical Images  
Vertical images are rotated automatically so they  
are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD  
monitor and computer instead of horizontally. The  
setting of this feature can be changed.  
Select [Auto rotate].  
1
  Under the [5] tab, select [Auto  
rotate], then press <0>.  
Set the auto rotation.  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
option, then press <0>.  
  OnzD  
The vertical image is atomatically rotated on both the camera’s  
LCD monitor and on the personal computer.  
  OnD  
The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the personal computer.  
  Off  
The vertical image is not rotated.  
Auto rotation will not work with vertical images captured while Auto rotate was set  
to [Off]. They will not be rotated even if you later switch it to [On] for playback.  
  Immediately after image capture, the vertical image will not be  
automatically rotated for the image review.  
  Movies cannot be rotated.  
  If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down, the  
image might not be rotated automatically for playback.  
  If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the personal  
computer screen, it means the software you are using is unable to rotate  
the image. Using the provided software is recommended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182  
Sensor Cleaning  
The camera has a Self Cleaning ensr Unit attached  
to the image sensor’s front layeow-pass filter) to  
shake off dust automatica
The Dust Delete Data can be appended to the  
image so that the dust spots remaining can be erased  
automatically by Digital Photo Professional (provided  
software).  
About smear adhering to the front of the sensor  
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases lubricant  
from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor.  
In case visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor cleaning,  
having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.  
Even while the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit is operating, you can  
press the shutter button halfway to interrupt the cleaning and start  
shooting immediately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
183  
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning  
Whenever you set the power switch to <1/J> or <  
2>, the Self Cleaning  
Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off any dust on the front of the  
sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this operation. However, you  
can execute the sensor cleaning at anytime as well as disable it.  
Cleaning the Sensor Now  
Select [Sensor cleaning].  
1
  Under the [7] tab, select [Sensor  
cleaning], then press <0>.  
Select [Clean nowf].  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Clean  
nowf], ten press <0>.  
Select K].  
  the <5> dial to select [OK],  
3
press <0>.  
X During the sensor cleaning, the  
<f> icon will be displayed on the  
LCD monitor. When the cleaning  
ends, the screen will return to step 2.  
  During the sensor cleaning, the shutter will make three shutter-release  
sounds. The camera is not taking pictures.  
  For best results, do the sensor cleaning while the camera bottom is  
placed on a table or other flat surface.  
  Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve that  
much. Right after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]  
option will remain disabled temporarily.  
Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning  
  In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].  
X The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the  
power switch to <1/J> or <2>.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
184  
3Appending Dust Delete Data  
Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust  
that might be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust  
still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image to later  
erase the dust spots. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital Photo  
Professional (provided software) to erase the dust spots automatically.  
Preparation  
  Get a solid-white object (paper, etc.).  
  Set the lens focal length to 50mm or longer.  
  Set the lens focus mode switch to <g> and set the focus to infinity  
(). If the lens has no distance scale, look at the front of the lens and  
turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.  
Obtain the Dust Delete Data  
Selec[Dut Delete Data].  
1
  Ur the [2] tab, select [Dust  
elte Data], then press <0>.  
Select [OK].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],  
2
then press <0>. After the automatic  
sensor cleaning ends, a message will  
appear. Although there will be a  
shutter sound, a picture is not taken.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
185  
3Appending Dust Delete Data  
Photograph a solid-white object.  
3
  At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm / 0.7 ft.  
- 1.0 ft., fill the viewfinder with a  
patternless, solid-white object and  
take a picture.  
X
The picture will be taken in the aperture-  
priority AE mode with an aperture of f/22.  
  Since the image will not be saved, the  
data can still be obtained even if there  
is no card in the camera.  
X
When the picture is taken, the camera  
will start obtaining the Dust Delete Data.  
When the Dust Delete Data is obtained,  
a message wl appear.  
SeleK], ad the menu will reappear.  
 
e dta was not obtained  
essfully, a message to that effect  
will appear. Follow the “Preparation”  
procedure on the preceding page, then  
select [OK]. Take the picture again.  
About the Dust Delete Data  
After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG  
and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, you  
should update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.  
To erase dust spots automatically with the provided software, see the  
Software Instruction Manual in the CD-ROM.  
The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly  
affects the image file size.  
Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the  
paper has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and  
affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the software.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
186  
3Manual Sensor Cleaning  
Dust which could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can  
be removed manually with a blower, etc.  
The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. If the  
sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon  
Service Center is recommended.  
Before cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.  
Select [Sensor cleaning].  
1
  Under the [7] tab, select [Sensor  
cleaning], then press <0>.  
Select [Clean manually].  
2
  Turn the 5> dial to select [Clean  
mually, then press <0>.  
ect [OK].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],  
3
then press <0>.  
X In a moment, the reflex mirror will  
lockup and the shutter will open.  
  CLn” will blink on the top LCD panel.  
End the cleaning.  
4
  After cleaning the sensor, set the  
power switch to <2>.  
  Using the AC Adapter Kit ACK-E4 (sold separately) as power source is  
recommended.  
  If you use the battery, make sure it is fully recharged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
3Manual Sensor Cleaning  
  While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the  
power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and  
image sensor might get damaged.  
• Setting the power switch to <2>.  
• Removing or inserting the battery.  
  The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor  
with care.  
  Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the  
sensor.  
  Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If  
the power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or  
reflex mirror might get damaged.  
  Never use canned air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowing force can  
damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor.  
  If smear that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the  
sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
188  
Printing Images  
  Printing (p.190)  
You can connect the camera dirto a printer and print  
out the images in the cardcamera is compatible with  
wPictBridge” which is thdard for direct printing.  
  Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.199)  
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print  
images recorded in the card according to your printing  
instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print,  
etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the  
print order to a photofinisher.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
189  
Preparing to Print  
The direct printing procedure is done entirely with the camera  
while you look at the LCD monitor.  
Connecting the Camera to a Printer  
Set the camera’s power switch to  
<2>.  
1
Set up the printer.  
2
  For details, see the printer’s  
instruction manual.  
Connecting he camera to a  
3 printe
  e thinterface cable provided with  
amera.  
  When connecting the cable plug to  
the <q/C> terminal,  
the cable plug’s <D> icon must face  
the back of the camera.  
  To connect to the printer, refer to the  
printer’s instruction manual.  
Turn on the printer.  
4
Set the camera’s power switch to  
5 <1>.  
X Some printers may make a beeping  
sound.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190  
Preparing to Print  
Playback the image.  
  Press the <x> button.  
X The image will appear, and the <w>  
icon will appear on the upper left to  
indicate that the camera is connected  
to a printer.  
wPictBridge  
6
  Movies cannot be pinted
  The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only with CP Direct  
or Bubble Jet Direct.  
  Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided.  
  If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates a problem with the  
printer. To find out what’s wrong, do the following:  
1. Press the <x> button to playback the image.  
2. Press <0>.  
3. On the print setting screen, select [Print].  
The error message will be displayed on the LCD monitor (p.198).  
  You can also print RAW images taken by this camera.  
  If you use the battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.  
With a fully-charged battery, printing up to approx. 6 hours is possible.  
  Before disconnecting the cable, turn off the camera and printer first. Hold  
the plug (not the cord) to pull out the cable.  
  For direct printing, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E4 (sold separately) to  
power the camera is recommended.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
191  
wPrinting  
The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the  
printer. Some settings might not be available. For details, see the  
printer’s instruction manual.  
Printer-connected icon  
Select the image to be printed.  
  Check that the <w> icon is  
1
displayed on the upper left of the LCD  
monitor.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
image to be printed.  
Press <  
0>.  
2
X The print setting screen will appear.  
Print setting screen  
Sets the rintineffects (p.194).  
Sets the or fie number imprinting to on  
Se quantity to be printed.  
Sets the trimming (cropping) (p.197).  
Sets the paper size, type, and layout.  
Returns to the screen in step 1.  
Starts the printing.  
The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.  
* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file  
number imprinting and trimming might not be available.  
Select [Paper settings].  
3
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Paper  
settings], then press <0>.  
X The paper settings screen will  
appear.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
192  
wPrinting  
QSetting the Paper Size  
YSetting the Paper Type  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the size  
of the paper loaded in the printer,  
then press <0>.  
X The paper type screen will appear.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the type  
of the paper loaded in the printer,  
then press <0>.  
 
When using a Canon printer and Canon  
paper, read the printer’s instruction manual  
to check what paper types can be used.  
X The paglayout screen will appear.  
USetting the Page Layout  
urn the <5> dial to select the page  
layout, then press <0>.  
X The print setting screen will reappear.  
Item  
Description  
Bordered  
The print will have white borders along the edges.  
The print will have no borders. If your printer cannot print  
borderless prints, the print will have borders.  
Borderless  
The shooting information* will be imprinted on the border on  
9x13cm and larger prints.  
Borderedc  
xx-up  
Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.  
On A4 or Letter size paper, 20 or 35 thumbnails of the images  
ordered through DPOF (p.199) will be printed.  
• [20-upc] will have the shooting information* imprinted.  
20-upc  
35-upp  
Default  
The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its settings.  
* From the Exif data, the camera name, lens name, shooting mode, shutter speed, aperture,  
exposure compensation amount, ISO speed, white balance, etc., will be imprinted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
193  
wPrinting  
Set the printing effects.  
4
  Set as necessary. If you need not set  
any printing effects, go to step 5.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the item  
on the upper right, then press <0>.  
  If the <e> icon is displayed next to  
<z>, you can also adjust the  
printing effect (p.196).  
  Next, turn the <5> dial to select the  
desired printing effect, then press  
<0>.  
Printing Effect  
Description  
The image will be printed accordinto the printer’s standard  
colors. The image’s Exif data is ud to make automatic  
corrections.  
EOn  
Same as the printinraeristics turned “On”. No automatic  
correction will be pd.  
EOff  
The image will be printd with higher saturation to produce  
more vivid blues ad greens.  
EVIVID  
The image noise is reduced before printing.  
Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.  
ENR  
0 B/W  
Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.  
Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.  
Warm tone  
0 Cool tone  
0
Prints the image in the actual colors and contrast. No automatic  
color adjustments are applied.  
zNatural  
zNatural M  
EDefault  
The printing characteristics are the same as the “Natural”  
setting. However, this setting enables finer printing adjustments  
than with “Natural.”  
The printing will differ depending on the printer. For details, see  
the printer’s instruction manual.  
* The screen display may differ depending on the printer.  
* When you change the printing effects, it is reflected in the image displayed  
on the upper left. Note that the printed image might look slightly different  
from the displayed image which is only an approximation. This also  
applies to [Brightness] and [Adjust levels] on page 196.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194  
wPrinting  
Set the date and file number  
5 imprinting.  
  Set as necessary.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select <I>,  
then press <0>.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
desired setting, then press <0>.  
Set the number of copies.  
  Set as necessary.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select <R>,  
then press <0>.  
6
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
number f copies, then press <0>.  
Stainting.  
Turthe <5> dial to select [Print],  
7
en press <0>.  
X The printing will start.  
  For details on trimming, see page 197.  
  The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the  
printer’s own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. See  
the printer’s instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings are.  
  When imprinting the shooting information c (p.193) for images shot at  
H2, H3 ISO speeds during ISO speed range expansion, the ISO speed  
setting may not be correctly printed.  
  Depending on the image’s file size and image size, it may take some  
time for the printing to start after you select [Print].  
  If image tilt correction (p.197) has been applied, it may take longer to  
print the image.  
 
To stop the printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select [OK].  
  If you execute the [7 Clear all camera settings] menu option (p.53), all  
the settings will revert to the default.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
wPrinting  
e Adjustment of Printing Effects  
In step 4 on page 194, select the printing  
effect. When the <e> icon is displayed  
next to <z>, press the <B>  
button. You can then adjust the printing  
effect. What can be adjusted or what is  
displayed will depend on the selection  
made in step 4.  
  Brightness  
The image brightness can be adjusted.  
  Adjust levels  
When you select [Manual], you can chang
the histogram’s distribution and adhe  
image’s brightness and contra
With the Adjust levels screen ye, press  
the <B> button to hange position of  
the <h>. Turn the <5> dial o freely adjust  
the shadow level (0 - 127) or highlight level (128 - 255).  
  kBrightener  
Effective in backlit conditions which can make the subject’s face look  
dark. When [On] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.  
  Red-eye corr.  
Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye. When [On]  
is set, the red eye will be corrected for printing.  
 
The [kBrightener] and [Red-eye corr.] effects will not show on the screen.  
  When [Detail set.] is selected, you can adjust the [Contrast],  
[Saturation], [Color tone], and [Color balance]. To adjust the [Color  
balance], use <9>. B is for blue, A is amber, M is magenta, and G is  
green. The color in the respective direction will be corrected.  
  If you select [Clear all], all the printing effect settings will be reverted to  
the default.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196  
wPrinting  
Trimming the Image  
Tilt correction  
You can crop the image and print only  
the trimmed portion as if the image was  
recomposed. Do the trimming right  
before printing. If you set the trimming  
and then set the print settings, you may  
have to set the trimming again.  
1 On the print setting screen, select [Trimming].  
2 Set the trimming frame size, position, and aspect ratio.  
 
The image area within the trimming frme will be printed. The  
trimming frame’s aspect ratio cbe canged with [Paper settings].  
Changing the trimming frme e  
When you press the <u<y> button, the size of the trimming  
frame will changeThe ser the trimming frame, the larger the  
image magnification wibe for printing.  
Moving the trimming frame  
Use <9> to move the frame over the image vertically or horizontally.  
Move the trimming frame until it covers the desired image area.  
Rotating the frame  
Each time you press the <  
B> button, the trimming frame will  
toggle between the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables  
you to create a vertical-oriented print from a horizontal image.  
Image tilt correction  
By turning the <5> dial, you can adjust the image tilt angle up to  
±10 degrees in 0.5-degree increments. When you adjust the  
image tilt, the < > icon on the screen will turn blue.  
3 Press <0> to exit the trimming.  
X The print setting screen will reappear.  
  You can check the trimmed image area on the upper left of the  
print setting screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
197  
wPrinting  
  Depending on the printer, the trimmed image area might not be printed  
as you specified.  
  The smaller you make the trimming frame, the grainier the picture will  
look on the print.  
  While trimming the image, look at the camera’s LCD monitor. If you look  
at the image on a TV screen, the trimming frame might not be displayed  
accurately.  
Handling Printer Errors  
If you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper, etc.) and select [Continue] to  
resume printing but it does not resume, operate the buttons on the printer to  
resume printing. For details, see the printer’s instruction manual.  
Error Messages  
If a problem occurs during printing, an error mesage will appear on the  
camera’s LCD monitor. Press <0> to stop prnng. After fixing the  
problem, resume printing. For details oto fia printing problem, refer  
to the printer’s instruction manual
Paper Error  
Check whether the papr is properly loaded in the printer.  
Ink Error  
Check the printer’s ink level, and check the waste ink tank.  
Hardware Error  
Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.  
File Error  
The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge. Images taken with a  
different camera or images edited with a computer might not be printable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198  
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)  
You can set the print type, date imprinting, and file No. imprinting. The  
print settings will be applied to all print-ordered images. (They cannot  
be set individually for each image.)  
Setting the Printing Options  
Select [Print order].  
1
  Under the [3] tab, select [Print  
order], then press <0>.  
Select [Set up].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Set up],  
2
then pres <0>.  
Set the option as desired.  
3
  Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File  
No.].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
option, then press <0>.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
setting, then press <0>.  
[Print type]  
[Date]  
[File No.]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
199  
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)  
Option  
Description  
Standard Prints one image on one sheet.  
K
L
Index  
Both  
Multiple, thumbnail images are printed on one sheet.  
Prints both the standard and index prints.  
Print type  
K
L
On  
Date  
[On] imprints the recorded date on the print.  
[On] imprints the file No. on the print.  
Off  
On  
Off  
File number  
Exit the setting.  
4
  Press the <7> button.  
X The print orer screen will reappear.  
  Nextect [Sel.Image], [By  
n], or  
image] to order the images to be  
ed.  
  Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file No. might not  
be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model.  
  When printing with DPOF, you must use the card whose print order  
specifications have been set. It will not work if you just extract images  
from the card and try to print them.  
  Certain DPOF-compatible printers and photofinishers might not be able  
to print the images as you specified. If this happens with your printer,  
refer to the printer’s instruction manual. Or check with your photofinisher  
about compatibility when ordering prints.  
  Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a  
different camera and then try to specify a print order. The print order may  
not work or may be overwritten. Also, depending on the image type, the  
print order may not be possible.  
  RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered.  
  With [Index] prints, both the [Date] and [File No.] cannot be set to [On]  
at the same time.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
200  
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)  
Print Ordering  
  Sel.Image  
Select and order images one by one.  
Press the <y> button to display the  
three-image view. To return to the single-  
image display, press the <u> button.  
After completing the print order, press  
the <M> button to save the print  
order to the card.  
[Standard] [Both]  
Press <0> and a print order for 1 copy  
of the displayed image will be placed.  
Then turn the <5> dial to set the  
number of cpies (up to 99) to be printed  
for tmag.  
Quantity  
Total images  
selected  
ex
s <  
be included in the index print. The <  
icon will also appear on the upper left.  
0>, and the displayed image will  
Check mark  
X
>
Index icon  
  Byn  
Select [Byn] and select the folder. A print order for 1 copy of all the  
images in the folder will be placed. If you select Clear all and a  
folder, the print order for all the images in the folder will be canceled.  
  All image  
A print order for 1 copy of all the images in the card will be placed. If  
you select Clear all, the print order for all the images in the card will  
be canceled.  
  Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order  
even if you set “Byn” or “All image.”  
  When using a PictBridge printer, print no more than 400 images for one  
print order. If you specify more than this, all the images might not be  
printed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
201  
W Direct Printing with DPOF  
With a PictBridge printer, you can easily  
print images with DPOF.  
1 Prepare to print.  
  See page 190. Follow the “Connecting the Camera to a Printer”  
procedure up to step 5.  
2 Under the [3] tab, select [Print order].  
3 Select [Print].  
  [Print] will be displayed only if the caera is connected to the  
printer and printing is possible.  
4 Set the [Paper settings]. 2)  
  Set the printing effets (p.194) if necessary.  
5 Select [OK].  
  Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.  
  Certain printers cannot imprint the file No.  
  If [Bordered] is set, certain printers might imprint the date on the border.  
  Depending on the printer, the date might look light if it is imprinted on a  
bright background or on the border.  
  Under [Adjust levels], [Manual] cannot be selected.  
  If you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining  
images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not resume if you stop  
the printing and any of the following occurs:  
• Before resuming the printing, you changed the print order or deleted  
print-ordered images.  
When you set the index, you changed the paper setting before resuming the printing.  
• When you paused the printing, the card’s remaining capacity was low.  
  If a problem occurs during printing, see page 198.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
202  
Customizing the  
Camera  
To suit your shooting preferenceyou an fine-tune the  
camera’s functions, save the cara settings to a card  
or register them to the ca
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
203  
3Setting Custom Functions  
Select [8].  
1
2
 
Turn the <6> dial to select the [8] tab.  
Select the group.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select C.Fn I -  
IV, then press <0>.  
Select the Custom Function  
Custom Function No.  
3 number.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
Custom Function No., then press  
<0>.  
Change the setting as desired.  
4
5
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
settinnumer), then press <0>.  
  Repeteps 2 to 4 if you want to set  
r Custom Functions.  
 
e bottom of the screen, the current  
Custom Function settings are indicated  
below the respective function numbers.  
Exit the setting.  
  Press the <M> button.  
X The screen for step 2 will reappear.  
Clearing All Custom Functions  
In step 2, select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] to clear all the  
Custom Function settings.  
Even if all the Custom Functions are cleared, the setting for [8C.Fn IV -12:  
Focusing Screen] will remain unchanged. The registered settings for  
[8C.Fn I -16: AE Microadjustment], [8C.Fn I -17: FE  
Microadjustment], and [8C.Fn III -7: AF Microadjustment] will also be  
retained but [0: Disable] will be set.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
204  
3 Custom Functions  
k
shooting  
Movie  
z LV  
shooting  
C.Fn I: Exposure  
1
Exposure level increments  
k
In M movie  
mode  
2
ISO speed setting increments  
k
k
p.208  
In M movie  
mode  
3
Set ISO speed range  
4
5
6
Bracketing auto cancel  
Bracketing sequence  
k
k
k
(Still photo  
with  
p.209  
p.210  
WB-BKT)  
Number of bracketed shots  
7
8
Spot metering link to AF point  
Safety shift  
k
9
Select usable shooting modes  
k
10 Select usable metering modes  
11 Exposure mode in manual re  
In M movie  
mode  
p.211  
12 Set shutter speed rage  
13 Set aperture value range  
k
k
In M movie  
mode  
14 Apply shooting/metering mode  
15 Flash sync. speed in Av mode  
p.212  
p.213  
k
k
16 AE Microadjustment  
17 FE Microadjustment  
k
  The shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV  
shooting) nor movie shooting. (Settings are disabled.)  
  In  
mode] (  
Therefore, the Custom Functions marked “With  
during movie shooting. (Functions only before movie shooting.)  
k
Movie shooting, even if the AF mode has been set to [Quick  
), it will switch to [Live mode] ( ) during movie shooting.  
”, do not function  
f
d
f
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
205  
3Custom Functions  
k
Movie  
zLV  
shooting  
C.Fn II: Image/Flash exposure/Display  
shooting  
(Still photo)  
(Still photo)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Long exposure noise reduction  
High ISO speed noise reduction  
Highlight tone priority  
Auto Lighting Optimizer  
E-TTL II flash metering  
Shutter curtain sync.  
k
k
p.214  
p.215  
k
k
k
k
k
Flash firing  
p.216  
p.217  
8
9
Viewfinder info. during exposure  
LCD panel illumination during Bulb  
k
10 INFO. button when shooting  
k
shooting  
Movie  
zLV  
shooting  
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive  
1
USM lens electronic MF  
k
p.218  
2
3
4
5
AI Servo tracking sensitivity  
AI Servo 1st/2nd image priority  
AI Servo AF tracking method  
Lens drive when AF impossible  
p.219  
p.220  
With f  
Except 4 (With f  
6
Lens AF stop button function  
only for some settings)  
7
8
9
AF Microadjustment  
p.221  
p.222  
With f  
With f  
AF expansion with selected point  
Multi-controller while metering  
p.223  
p.224  
10 Selectable AF point  
With f  
With 2+f  
With f  
11 Switch to registered AF point  
12 AF point auto selection  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
206  
3Custom Functions  
13 AF point display during focus  
14 AF point brightness  
With f  
With f  
With f  
With f  
p.225  
15 AF-assist beam firing  
16 Orientation linked AF point  
17 Mirror lockup  
p.226  
p.227  
18 Continuous shooting speed  
k
k
19 Limit continuous shot count  
k
shooting  
Movie  
zLV  
shooting  
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others  
1
2
Shutter button/AF-ON button  
AF-ON/AE lock button switch  
k
k
p.227  
p.28  
p.229  
1,3: With f  
+2,4: M movie mode  
3
Quick Control Dial in metering  
k
4
5
Assign SET button  
Tv/Av setting for Maual exp
k (In M)  
In M movie  
mode  
6
7
Dial direction during Tv/Av  
Av setting without lens  
k
p.230  
In M movie  
mode  
k
8
9
WB + media/image size setting  
Hbutton function  
p.231  
p.232  
10 Button function when 5<OFF>  
11 Start movie shooting  
k
k
12 Focusing screen  
[Timer after release]  
13 Timer length for timer  
only  
p.233  
p.234  
14 Shortened release time lag  
15 Add aspect ratio information  
(Still photo)  
(Still photo)  
k
k
16 Add image verification data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
207  
3 Custom Function Settings  
Custom Functions are organized in four groups based on the function  
type: C.Fn I: Exposure, C.Fn II: Image/Flash exp (exposure)/Disp  
(Display), C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive, and C.Fn IV: Operation/Others.  
Note that some Custom Function numbers differ from the  
EOS-1D Mark III’s Custom Functions.  
C.Fn I: Exposure  
C.Fn I -1 Exposure level increments  
0: 1/3-stop set 1/3-stop compensation  
1: 1-stop set  
1/3-stop compensation  
Sets full-stop increments for the shutter speed and aperture.  
2: 1/2-stop set 1/2-stop compensation  
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, and exposure  
compensation.  
If 2 is set, the viewfinder and the top LCnel dsplay for 1/2-stop  
increments will change as follows
”.  
C.Fn I -2 ISO speed settiincrements  
0: 1/3-stop  
1: 1-stop  
C.Fn I -3 Set ISO speed range  
Disable: The settable ISO speed range will be 100 - 12800.  
Enable: The settable ISO speed will range from the highest ISO speed  
to the lowest ISO speed set with [Register].  
Register: The highest ISO speed can be registered within 100 to H3  
(102400), and the lowest ISO speed can be registered within L  
(50) to H2 (51200). After entering the settings, select [Apply].  
  If you want to set the ISO speed range expansion in the same way as  
other EOS cameras, set the upper limit to [H1], [H2], or [H3], and the  
lower limit to [L].  
  Even if C.Fn I -3 is set to L as the lower limit, L cannot be selected during  
manual exposure movie shooting (ISO 50).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
208  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn I -4 Bracketing auto cancel  
0: On  
The AEB and WB-BKT settings will be canceled if you set the power  
switch to <2> or clear the camera settings. AEB will also be  
canceled when bulb exposure is set or the flash is ready to fire.  
1: Off  
The AEB and WB-BKT settings will be retained even when the power  
switch is set to <2>. (When the flash is ready, AEB will be canceled.  
However, the AEB amount will be retained in memory.)  
C.Fn I -5 Bracketing sequence  
The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can  
be changed.  
0: 0, -, +  
1: -, 0, +  
2: +, 0, -  
WB Bracketing  
AEB  
Becton  
M/G Direction  
0 : Standard exposure : Standwhite balance 0 : Standard white balance  
- : Decreased exposure - Blubias  
+ : Increased exposure + : Amber bias  
- : Magenta bias  
+ : Green bias  
C.Fn I -6 Number of bracketed shots  
The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can be  
changed from the usual 3 shots to 2, 5, or 7 shots. When C.Fn I -5-0 is set,  
the bracketed shots will be taken as shown in the table below.  
0: 3 shots  
2: 5 shots  
1: 2 shots  
3: 7 shots  
(1-stop increments)  
1st shot 2nd shot 3rd shot 4th shot 5th shot 6th shot 7th shot  
0: 3 shots Standard (0)  
1: 2 shots Standard (0)  
2: 5 shots Standard (0)  
3: 7 shots Standard (0)  
-1  
-1  
-2  
-3  
+1  
-1  
-2  
+1  
-1  
+2  
+1  
+2  
+3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
209  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn I -7 Spot metering link to AF point  
0: Disable (use center AF point)  
1: Enable (use active AF point)  
If [8C.Fn III -10: Selectable AF point] (p.223) is set to [1: 19 points],  
[2: 11points], [3: Inner 9 points] or [4: Outer 9 points], spot metering  
linked to the selected AF point is possible. With automatic AF point  
selection, spot metering will be at the viewfinder center.  
If C.Fn III -10 is set to [0: 45 points], spot metering at the center will be set  
even if C.Fn I -7 is set to [1: Enable (use active AF point)].  
C.Fn I -8 Safety shift  
0: Disable  
1: Enable (Tv/Av)  
This works in the shutter-priority AE (s) and aperture-priority AE (f)  
modes. When the subject’s brightnesangs erratically and the  
correct autoexposure cannot be obtaithe camera will change the  
exposure setting automatically ain a correct exposure.  
2: Enable (ISO speed)  
This works in the Program AE (d), shutter-priority AE (s), and  
aperture-priority AE (f) moes. When the subject’s brightness  
changes erratically and the correct autoexposure cannot be obtained,  
the camera will change the ISO speed automatically to obtain a correct  
exposure.  
  Even if the exposure settings settable range has been changed with  
C.Fn I -3,12,13, the safety shift will override it when necessary to obtain  
the correct exposure.  
  With settings 1 and 2, safety shift also works with flash.  
C.Fn I -9 Select usable shooting modes  
Disable: All the shooting modes (a, s, f, d, BULB) will be  
selectable.  
Enable: Only the shooting modes set with [Register] will be selectable.  
Register: To make a shooting mode unselectable, uncheck the checkmark  
<X>. After entering the settings, select [Apply].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
210  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn I -10 Select usable metering modes  
Disable: All the metering modes (q: Evaluative, w: Partial, r: Spot,  
e: Center-weighted average) will be selectable.  
Enable: Only the metering modes set with [Register] will be selectable.  
Register: To make a metering mode unselectable, uncheck the checkmark  
<X>. After entering the settings, select [Apply].  
C.Fn I -11 Exposure mode in manual exposure  
You can set the metering mode to be used in the manual exposure mode.  
0: Specified metering mode  
1: Evaluative metering  
2: Partial metering  
3: Spot metering  
4: Center-weighted average  
With settings 1 to 4, you cannot change the metering mode by pressing the  
<Q> button during shooting.  
C.Fn I -12 Set shuttped range  
Disable: The settable shutter range will be 1/8000 sec. to 30 sec.  
Enable: The settable sutter speed will range from the highest shutter  
speed to the lowest shutter speed set with [Register].  
Register: The highest shutter speed can be registered within 1/8000 sec.  
to 15 sec., and the lowest shutter speed can be registered within  
30 sec. to 1/4000 sec. After entering the settings, select [Apply].  
C.Fn I -13 Set aperture value range  
Disable: The settable aperture will range from the camera-attached lens’  
maximum aperture to minimum aperture.  
Enable: The settable aperture will range from the smallest to largest  
aperture set with [Register].  
Register: The smallest aperture can be registered within f/91 to f/1.4, and  
the largest aperture can be registered within f/1.0 to f/64. After  
entering the settings, select [Apply].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
211  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn I -14 Apply shooting/metering mode  
While holding down the <A> (AE lock) button, you can switch to the  
registered setting (shooting mode, metering mode, shutter speed, aperture,  
or exposure compensation).  
Disable: Pressing the <A> button will lock the exposure (AE lock).  
Enable: By holding down the <A> button, you can instantly switch to the  
registered setting.  
Register: Set the desired setting for the AE lock button: Shooting mode,  
metering mode, shutter speed, aperture, or exposure  
compensation.  
When you select [Register], [With AE lock button (AF on/AF  
off)] will be displayed where you can set the <A> AE lock button  
to also execute AF or not. Select [AF on/AF off] to register the  
setting to the camera.  
This setting cannot be registered if the shoting ode is set to “Bulb”.  
C.Fn I -15 Flash sync. d in Av mode  
You can set the flash-sync peed for sh photography in the aperture-  
priority AE (f) mode.  
0: Auto  
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/300 sec. to  
30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. High-speed sync can also be  
used.  
1: 1/300-1/60 sec. auto  
Prevents the sync speed from being set too slow under low-light  
conditions. It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.  
However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash, the  
background may come out dark.  
2: 1/300 sec. (fixed)  
The flash-sync speed is fixed to 1/300 sec. This more effectively  
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with setting 1. However,  
the background may come out darker than with setting 1.  
When 1 or 2 is set, high-speed sync cannot be used with an external  
Speedlite.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
212  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn I -16 AE Microadjustment  
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Do this adjustment  
only if necessary. Note that doing this adjustment may prevent  
correct exposure from being achieved.  
You can fine adjust the camera’s standard exposure level. The adjustment  
can help if the camera’s “standard exposure” always seems to be  
underexposed or overexposed.  
With setting 1 selected, press the <B> button to display the adjustment  
screen.  
0: Disable  
1: Enable  
The adjustment can be made up to ±1 stop  
in 1/8-stop increments. If the image tends to  
be underexposed, set the adjustment to the  
+ side. Or to the - side if the image tends o  
be overexposed.  
C.Fn I -17 FE Microament  
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Do this adjustment  
only if necessary. Note that doing this adjustment may prevent  
the correct flash exposure from being obtained.  
You can fine adjust the camera’s standard flash exposure level. The  
adjustment can help if the camera’s “standard flash exposure” (without  
flash exposure compensation) always seems to be underexpose or  
overexpose the subject.  
With setting 1 selected, press the <B> button to display the adjustment  
screen.  
0: Disable  
1: Enable  
The adjustment can be made up to ±1 stop  
in 1/8-stop increments. If the subject tends  
to be underexposed, set the adjustment to  
the + side. Or to the - side if the subject  
tends to be overexposed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
213  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn II: Image/Flash exposure/Display  
C.Fn II -1 Long exposure noise reduction  
0: Off  
1: Auto  
For 1 sec. or longer exposures, noise reduction is performed  
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This [Auto]  
setting is effective in most cases.  
2: On  
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer. The  
[On] setting may be effective for noise that cannot be detected or  
reduced with the [Auto] setting.  
  With setting 1 and 2, after the picture is taken, the noise reduction  
process may take the same amount of time as the exposure. During the  
noise reduction, shooting is still possible alng as the maximum burst  
indicator in the viewfinder shows “1gher.  
  At ISO 1600 and higher, noise ght more pronounced with setting 2  
than with setting 0 or 1.  
 
With setting 2, if a long eposure is during Live View display, “BUSY” will be  
displayed during the noise reducon process and the Live View display will not  
appear until the noise reduction is completed. (You cannot take another picture.)  
C.Fn II -2 High ISO speed noise reduction  
Reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise reduction is applied at all  
ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high ISO speeds. At low ISO speeds, the  
noise in the shadow areas is further reduced. Change the setting to suit the noise level.  
0: Standard  
1: Low  
2: Strong  
3: Disable  
 
With setting 2, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will greatly decrease.  
  This function does not work with movies. However, the noise reduction  
setting will be applied to still photos taken during movie shooting.  
  If you playback a RAW or RAW+JPEG image with the camera or print  
the image directly, the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may  
look minimal. You can check the noise reduction effect or print noise-  
reduced images with Digital Photo Professional (provided software).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
214  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn II -3 Highlight tone priority  
0: Disable  
1: Enable  
Improves the highlight detail. The dynamic range is expanded from the  
standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between the grays  
and highlights becomes smoother.  
With setting 1, noise may be slightly more pronounced than usual.  
With setting 1, the settable ISO speed range will be 200 - 12800.  
Also, <H> will be displayed on the top LCD panel and in the viewfinder.  
C.Fn II -4 Auto Lighting Optimizer  
If the image comes out dark or the contrast ilow, the brightness and  
contrast can be corrected automatically.  
For details on the Auto Lighting Opti, see page 81.  
0: Standard  
1: Low  
2Strong  
3: Disable  
C.Fn II -5 E-TTL II fash metering  
0: Evaluative flash metering  
Fully automatic flash photography for all conditions, from low light to  
daylight fill-flash.  
1: Average flash metering  
The entire metered area is averaged. Since automatic flash exposure  
compensation will not be executed, you may have to set it yourself  
depending on the scene. This also applies if you use FE lock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
215  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn II -6 Shutter curtain sync.  
0: 1st-curtain synchronization  
1: 2nd-curtain synchronization  
The flash fires immediately before the exposure ends. When this is  
combined with a slow sync speed, you can create a trail of light such as  
from car headlights at night.  
This Custom Function can be used to obtain 2nd-curtain sync effects even with  
EX-series Speedlites which do not have this feature (except Speedlite 270EX).  
 
When using EX-series Speedlites having the shutter curtain synchronization  
function, C.Fn II -6’s setting does not take effect. Set the shutter curtain  
synchronization in the Flash functions settings menu (p.122) or directly on the flash.  
When using a Speedlite 270EX, shutter curtain synchronization can be set in the  
Flash functions settings menu.  
If 1 is set and you press the shutter button completely, note that the flash will fire a  
total of two times right before the exposure ends
When using 2nd-curtain sync, set the shutpeed 1/50 sec. or slower. If the  
shutter speed is 1/60 sec. or faster, 1st-cusync will be applied even if 1 is set.  
 
 
 
C.Fn II -7 Flash firing  
Enables or disables the firinof aexternal flash or non-Canon flash  
connected to the PC terminal.  
0: Enable  
1: Disable  
Convenient when you want to use the external flash’s AF-assist beam  
only. Note that whether or not the AF-assist beam is emitted depends on  
the C.Fn III -15 setting.  
C.Fn II -8 Viewfinder info. during exposure  
0: Disable  
1: Enable  
The viewfinder information will be displayed even during an exposure.  
Displays the exposure setting, number of remaining shots, etc., during  
continuous shooting.  
When the shooting mode is set to “Bulb”, even if setting 1 is set, it will not  
take effect.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
216  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn II -9 LCD panel illumination during Bulb  
0: Off  
1: On during Bulb  
If the LCD panel illumination is on (p.116) and you take a bulb exposure,  
the illumination will continue until the bulb exposure ends. This is  
convenient when you are taking a bulb exposure in low light and want to  
check the exposure time.  
C.Fn II -10 INFO. button when shooting  
You can change what is displayed on the LCD monitor when you press the  
<B> button while the camera is ready to shoot.  
0: Displays shooting functions (p.23)  
Displays shooting functions as found on the  
top LCD panel and in the viewfinder.  
While the shooting settings are displayed
you can press the <W> <o
<Q> <Y> <Z> <O> or <
button to display the respecfunon  
screen and turn the <6> > ial to  
change the setting.  
1: Displays camera settings (p.246)  
Displays the camera settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
217  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive  
C.Fn III -1 USM lens electronic MF  
The USM lens electronic MF can be enabled or disabled when you use any  
of the following lenses.  
EF50mm f/1.0L USM, EF85mm f/1.2L USM,  
EF85mm f/1.2L II USM, EF200mm f/1.8L USM,  
EF300mm f/2.8L USM, EF400mm f/2.8L USM,  
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM, EF500mm f/4.5L USM,  
EF600mm f/4L USM, EF1200mm f/5.6L USM,  
EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM  
0: Enable after One-Shot AF  
After focus is achieved in One-Shot AF, electronic MF is enabled. If C.Fn  
IV -1-2/3 is set, it is also enabled before focus is achieved.  
1: Disable after One-Shot AF  
After focus is achieved in One-Shot AF, electnic MF is disabled. If  
C.Fn IV -1-2/3 is set, it is possible befocuis achieved.  
2: Disable in AF mode  
Electronic MF is disabled in thod.  
C.Fn III -2 AI Servo tracking sensitivity  
During focusing in AI Servo AF mode, the AF sensitivity for tracking subjects (or  
obstacles) moving into the AF points can be set to one of five levels.  
If it is set toward [Slow], interruptions by any obstacles will be less  
disruptive. It makes it easier to keep tracking the target subject.  
If it is set toward [Fast], it will be easier to focus any subject which suddenly  
enters the picture from the side. Convenient when you want to successively  
photograph multiple subjects located at random distances.  
C.Fn III -3 AI Servo 1st/2nd image priority  
When AI Servo AF is used with continuous shooting, you can change the  
Servo’s operation characteristics and shutter-release timing.  
0: AF priority/Tracking priority  
For the first shot, focusing the subject is given priority. For the second and following  
shots during continuous shooting, focus-tracking of the subject is given priority.  
1: AF priority/Drive speed priority  
For the first shot, focusing the subject is given priority. During continuous shooting,  
the continuous shooting speed is given priority over the focus-tracking of the subject.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
218  
3 Custom Function Settings  
2: Release/Drive speed priority  
For the first shot, shutter release is given priority over focusing the  
subject. During continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed is  
given priority more than with setting 1.  
3: Release/Tracking priority  
For the first shot, shutter release is given priority over focusing the  
subject. For the second and following shots during continuous shooting,  
focus-tracking of the subject is given priority.  
C.Fn III -4 AI Servo AF tracking method  
In the AI Servo AF mode while you are focus-tracking a subject, the camera  
can either continue focusing the target subject even if a closer subject  
(closer than at the main focus point) suddenly appears in the picture, or the  
camera can switch to focus the closer subject.  
*
Main focus point = With automatic AF point selecon: Center AF point  
With manual AF point seletio+ AF point expansion (C.Fn III -8-  
1/2/3): Manually-selecd AF int  
0: Main focus point priority  
The active AF point will swithe main focus point and start focusing  
the closer subject. Convenien you always want to focus the  
closest subject.  
1: Continuous AF track prioity  
Any closer subject appearing in the picture will be ignored as an  
obstruction. The main focus point does not take priority, so the tracking  
of the target subject can continue and switch to an adjacent AF point  
based on the preceding focusing result. Convenient when obstacles  
such as telephone poles appear in front of the target subject.  
C.Fn III -5 Lens drive when AF impossible  
If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, the camera can either keep  
trying to focus or stop.  
0: Focus search on  
1: Focus search off  
Prevents the camera from becoming grossly out of focus as it attempts  
to focus again. Especially convenient with super telephoto lenses which  
can become extremely out of focus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
219  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn III -6 Lens AF stop button function  
* The AF stop button is provided only on super telephoto IS lenses.  
0: AF stop  
1: AF start  
AF operates only while the button is pressed. While you hold down the  
button, AF will not work on the camera.  
2: AE lock  
When the button is pressed, AE lock is applied. Convenient when you  
want to focus and meter at different parts of the picture.  
3: AF point: M 9 Auto/Auto 9 Center  
In the manual AF point selection mode, the button instantly switches to  
automatic AF point selection (among 45 AF points) while you hold it  
down. Convenient when you are no longer able to focus track a moving  
subject with a manually-selected AF point in the AI Servo AF mode.  
In the automatic AF point selection mode, the button selects the center  
AF point only while you hold it down.  
4: ONE SHOT z AI SERVO  
In the One-Shot AF mode, the cera witches to AI Servo AF mode  
only while you hold down the bAnin the AI Servo AF mode, the  
camera switches to OneShot Ade only while you hold down the  
button.  
Convenient when you need to keep switching between One-Shot AF  
and AI Servo AF for a subject which keeps moving and stopping.  
5: IS start  
With the lens’ IS switch already <ON>, the Image Stabilizer operates  
when you press the button. The Image Stabilizer will not operate when  
you press the shutter button halfway.  
6: Switch to registered AF point  
While holding down the AF Stop button, press the <I> button to  
switch to the registered AF point. Press it again to switch to the previous  
AF point. To register the AF point, see page 224.  
7: Spot AF  
The focusing line sensor’s active area is made narrower to enable a  
narrower part to be focused. This works in all AF modes and with any AF  
point selection method. It is especially convenient during manual AF  
point selection. However, since it is difficult to keep the AF point on a  
moving subject, focusing might be difficult. With spot AF, the AF point  
will blink brighter than usual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
220  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn III -7 AF Microadjustment  
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Do this adjustment  
only if necessary. Note that doing this adjustment may prevent  
correct focusing from being achieved.  
You can make fine adjustments for the AF’s  
point of focus. It can be adjusted in ±20 steps  
(-:  
Forward / +:  
Backward).  
The adjustment amount of one step varies  
depending on the maximum aperture of the  
lens. Adjust, shoot, and check the focus,  
then repeat to adjust the AF’s point of focus.  
With setting 1 or 2 selected, press the <B> button to view the register  
screen. To cancel all the registered adjustments, press the <L> button.  
0: Disable  
1: Adjust all by same amount  
The same adjustment amount is applied t
all lenses.  
2: Adjust by lens  
An adjustment can be set individually for  
any particular lens. Adjustments for up to 20  
lenses can be registered in the camera.  
When a lens whose focus adjustment has  
been registered is attached to the camera,  
its point of focus will be shifted accordingly.  
If adjustments for 20 lenses have already been registered and you want  
to register an adjustment for another lens, select a lens whose  
adjustment can be overwritten or deleted.  
 
When you adjust, shoot, and check the focus to make the adjustment, set the  
image size to JPEG Large and the JPEG quality (compression) to 8 or higher.  
  It is best to make the adjustment at the actual place where you will shoot.  
This will make the adjustment more precise.  
  With setting 2, if an Extender is used, the adjustment will be registered  
for the lens and Extender combination.  
  AF adjustment cannot be done during Live View shooting in Live and u  
Live modes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
221  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn III -8 AF expansion with selected point  
During manual AF point selection, it is possible to activate the AF points  
surrounding the selected AF point for AF. This function works in both the  
One-Shot AF and AI Servo AF modes.  
Convenient when it is difficult to track a moving subject with just one  
manually-selected AF point. If the manually-selected AF point cannot  
focus, focusing will be done with the expanded AF points.  
0: Disable  
1: Left/right AF point  
The points on the immediate left and right (or top and bottom for a  
vertical shot) of the manually-selected AF point become active.  
2: Surrounding AF points  
The adjacent AF points surrounding the manually-selected AF point  
become active.  
3: All 45 points area  
In the AI Servo AF mode, the autofocus will cnter on the manually-  
selected AF point with the row of six Aints ght above and below the  
AF point and the three AF points n thmmediate left and right will also  
become active (total of eighteeoits). If the subject moves to  
another AF point within te expAF points, the expanded AF will  
center on that AF point. ince all 45 AF points will operate, as long as  
the subject is within the Area F frame, it will be focused at all times.  
In the One-Shot AF mode, if focus cannot be achieved with the manually-  
selected AF point, focusing will be done with the remaining 44 AF points.  
 
 
 
Even when C.Fn III -10-1/2/3/4 is set, the AF point expansion will take effect.  
In AI Servo AF mode, first focus with the manually-selected AF point.  
If there are two manually-selected AF points and setting 1 is set, the AF point  
on the left and right of the two AF points will become active. If setting 2 is set,  
up to eight AF points adjacent to the two AF points will become active.  
The AF point expansion centers on the selected AF point. Therefore, if a peripheral  
AF point is selected, the AF point expansion will be smaller as shown below.  
 
Expanded by one AF  
point on the left/right  
Expanded by one  
AF point all around  
All 45 AF points  
can be used  
Selected AF point  
Expansion points  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
222  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn III -9 Multi-controller while metering  
0: Off  
1: AF point selection  
During viewfinder shooting while the metering is active, you can select  
the AF point directly with <9> instead of pressing the <S> button first.  
C.Fn III -10 Selectable AF point  
You can change the number of manually-selectable AF points. During  
automatic AF point selection, all 45 AF points will be selectable regardless  
of the setting below.  
0: 45 points  
1: 19 points  
Sets the same manually-selectable 19 points as with the EOS-1D Mark  
III.  
2: 11 points  
Sets 11 manually-selectable AF p.  
3: Inner 9 points  
Sets 9 manually-selectable AF points.  
4: Outer 9 points  
Sets 9 manually-selecable outer AF points.  
The AF point selection sequence is shown below:  
Automatic  
selection  
[19 points]  
[11 points]  
Automatic  
selection  
[Inner 9 points]  
[Outer 9 points]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
223  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn III -11 Switch to registered AF point  
You can instantly switch to the registered AF point with <9> or the <w>  
button while the metering timer is active. The AF will operate when the  
switch is made.  
0: Disable  
1: Switch with <9>  
By pressing <9>, you can switch to the registered AF point. Press it  
again to switch to the previous AF point.  
2: Only while <A> is pressed  
You can switch to the registered AF point only while you hold down the  
<A> button. When you release the <A> button, the camera will return  
to the original AF point.  
Registering the AF point  
You can register an AF point you use frequently.  
1. Select the AF point to be registered. (p.97)  
2. While holding down the <S> button, ss th<Z> button.  
- -  
- -  
[ ] HP: Automatic selection, SEL [ enter AF point,  
SEL HP : Off-center AF poin
If you change the C.Fn III 10 sete registered AF point will be  
canceled. The camera wilswitch to the center AF point.  
You cannot register multiple AF oints.  
C.Fn III -12 AF point auto selection  
For AF point selection, you can enable or disable automatic selection.  
The setting before the slash (/) applies to the <5> dial’s function while the  
metering timer is active with C.Fn IV -3-1/3 set. And the setting after the  
slash applies to the <6> dial’s function when the <S> button is pressed.  
0: 5direct:disable/6:enable  
When metering is active, the <5> dial cannot select automatic  
selection. You can select automatic selection with <6>.  
1: 5direct:disable/6:disable  
Automatic selection cannot be selected.  
2: 5direct:enable/6:enable  
When metering is active, the <5> dial can select automatic selection.  
You can select automatic selection with <6>.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
224  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn III -13 AF point display during focus  
0: On  
1: Off  
The AF point will not light in red other than during AF point selection.  
2: On (when focus achieved)  
During AF, the manually-selected AF point will no longer light faintly.  
After AF starts, the AF point will light only when it achieves focus.  
C.Fn III -14 AF point brightness  
0: Normal  
1: Brighter  
Makes the AF point light up brighter in red.  
C.Fn III -15 AF-assist beam firing  
Enables or disables the EOS-dedicated Spedlite’s AF-assist beam.  
0: Enable  
The external Speedlite will he F-assist beam when necessary.  
1: Disable  
2: IR AF assist beam only  
Among external Speeditesonly those which have an infrared AF-assist  
beam will be able to emit the beam. Set this if you do not want the AF  
assist to be emitted as small flashes.  
The external Speedlite’s Custom Function [AF-assist beam firing] set to  
[Disabled] will override this Custom Function’s 0 and 2 settings. The AF-  
assist beam will not be emitted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
225  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn III -16 Orientation linked AF point  
You can either use the same AF point or a different AF point for vertical and  
horizontal shooting.  
0: Same for both vertical/horizontal  
The same AF point is used for both vertical and horizontal shooting.  
1: Select different AF points  
A different AF point can be set separately for vertical and horizontal  
shooting. The camera’s orientation is detected automatically and the set  
AF point switches automatically.  
If 1 is set, select separately the AF point (p.97) for the vertical (grip  
up and down) and horizontal orientations. The AF point selected for  
the respective orientations will be recorded in the camera.  
If 1 is set and the camera settings are cleared (p.53), the AF points set for  
the vertical and horizontal orientations will be canceled and the center AF  
point will be selected.  
C.Fn III -17 Mirror lockup  
See page 118 for the mirror lockudure.  
0: Disable  
1: Enable  
2: Enable: Down with SET (button)  
With setting 1 and 2, the <2> icon will appear on the top LCD panel.  
C.Fn III -18 Continuous shooting speed  
Disable: Continuous shooting will be enabled:  
<o>: Approx. 10 fps, <p>: Approx. 3 fps  
Enable: The continuous shooting speed set with [Register] will be enabled.  
Register: <o> can be set within 2 fps to 10 fps, and <p> can be set  
within 1 fps to 9 fps. After entering the settings, select [Apply].  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
226  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn III -19 Limit continuous shot count  
Disable: Continuous shooting is not limited to any number of shots.  
Continuous shooting will be possible up to the current maximum  
burst displayed.  
Enable: The continuous shooting will be limited to the number of shots set  
with [Register] after which the shooting will stop automatically.  
Register: The continuous shot count can be limited between 2 to 99. After  
entering the settings, select [Apply].  
C.Fn IV: Operation/Others  
C.Fn IV -1 Shutter button/AF-ON button  
0: Metering + AF start  
1: Metering + AF start/AF stop  
Pressing the <p> button duAF wl stop the AF operation.  
2: Metering start/Meter + AF t  
This is useful for subjects weep moving and stopping repeatedly.  
In the AI Servo AF mde, you press the <p> button to  
repeatedly start or stothe AI Servo AF operation. The exposure is set  
at the moment the picture is taken. Thus, the optimum focusing and  
exposure will always be achieved as you wait for the decisive moment.  
3: AE lock/Metering + AF start  
Convenient when you want to focus and meter at different parts of the  
picture. Press the <p> button to meter and autofocus, and press  
the shutter button halfway to attain AE lock.  
4: Metering + AF start/Disable  
The <p> button will not function.  
C.Fn IV -2 AF-ON/AE lock button switch  
0: Disable  
1: Enable  
The functions of the <p> and <A/y> buttons will be switched  
between them.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
227  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn IV -3 Quick Control Dial in metering  
The Quick Control Dial’s function while the metering is active can be  
changed.  
0: Exposure compensation/Aperture  
1: AF point selection  
You can select the AF point directly with the <5> dial without first  
pressing the <S> button. While metering is active, turning the <5>  
dial will select a horizontal AF point. Automatic selection cannot be  
selected. However, if C.Fn III -12-2 has also been set, automatic  
selection can be selected.  
Press the <O> button and turn the <6/5> dial to set the exposure  
compensation or the aperture for manual exposure.  
2: ISO speed  
You can turn the <5> dial to change the ISO speed in real-time.  
3: AF point selection + Oz S  
You can select the AF point directly with the 5> dial without first  
pressing the <S> button. While metis aive, turning the <5>  
dial will select a horizontal AF pAuomatic selection cannot be  
selected. However, if C.Fn III -s also been set, automatic  
selection can be selecte.  
The functions of the <O> and <S> buttons will be switched between  
them. By holding down the <S> button and turning the <6> dial, you  
can set the exposure compensation or aperture.  
4: ISO speed + Oz Z  
You can turn the <5> dial to change the ISO speed in real-time.  
The functions of the <O> and <Z> buttons will be switched between  
them. By holding down the <Z> button and turning the <6> dial,  
you can set the exposure compensation or aperture.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
228  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn IV -4 Assign SET button  
You can assign a frequently-used function to <0>. Press <0> when the  
camera is shooting-ready.  
0: Normal (disabled)  
1: White balance  
While looking at the rear LCD panel, you can change the white balance.  
2: Image size  
While looking at the rear LCD panel, you can change the card and  
image size.  
3: ISO speed  
While looking at the top LCD panel or in the viewfinder, you can change  
the ISO speed.  
4: Picture Style  
The Picture Style screen will appear.  
5: Record func. + media/folder  
The [5 Record func+media/foldesel.] menu will appear.  
6: Menu display  
Assigns the same function <M> button.  
7: Image playback  
Assigns the same function as the <x> button.  
If the camera has been set to enable Live View shooting (p.126) or movie  
shooting (p.142), the Live View or movie shooting will override all of the  
above settings 1 to 7.  
C.Fn IV -5 Tv/Av setting for Manual exposure  
0: Tv=6/Av=5  
1: Tv=5/Av=6  
Convenient when you use studio flash and frequently change the  
aperture.  
Also, when you use AEB in the manual exposure mode, the shutter  
speed can stay fixed while only the aperture is shifted for AEB. The  
shutter speed can also be set by pressing the <O> button and turning  
the <6/5> dial.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
229  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn IV -6 Dial direction during Tv/Av  
0: Normal  
1: Reverse direction  
The dial’s turning direction for setting the shutter speed and aperture  
can be reversed.  
In the manual exposure mode, the direction of the <6> and <5>  
dials will be reversed. In other shooting modes, the <6> dial will be  
reversed. The <5> dial’s turning direction will be the same for the  
manual exposure mode and exposure compensation.  
C.Fn IV -7 Av setting without lens  
0: Disable  
1: Enable  
You can set the aperture with the camera even while the lens is  
detached. For studio photography when the aperture is already  
determined, you can set the aperture beforend.  
C.Fn IV -8 WB + mediaagsize setting  
When you press the <B> buttoelect or set the white balance,  
card, or image size, you can choose to do it with the rear LCD panel or with  
the menu screen.  
0: Rear LCD panel  
1: LCD monitor  
When you press the <B> button, the menu screen will appear. Each  
time you press the button, the screen will change to display the [White  
balance], [Image size], and [Record func+media/folder sel.].  
Even with setting 1, if you press the <B> button during Live View or  
movie shooting, you can set the settings above while looking at the rear  
LCD panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
230  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn IV -9 Hbutton function  
0: Protect (hold: Record memo)  
When you hold down the <H> button for 2 sec., you can start  
recording a voice memo. When you let go of the button, the voice memo  
recording will stop.  
1: Record memo (Protect: Disabled)  
When you press the <H> button, you can start recording a voice  
memo immediately. When you let go of the button, the voice memo  
recording will stop. To protect an image, use the [3 Protect images]  
menu option.  
2: Play memo (hold: Record memo)  
Plays the voice memo appended to the image. Press the <H> button  
to play the voice memo. When you hold down the <H> button for 2  
sec. during image playback, you can start recording a voice memo.  
When you let go of the button, the voice memo recording will stop. To  
protect an image, use the [3 Protect mges] menu option.  
C.Fn IV -10 Button functiwhen 5<OFF>  
0: Normal (enable)  
1: Disable 6,5,Mul-contro
When the power switcis et to <1>, the <6>, <5>, and <9>  
will be disabled from setting anything. The shutter button can still be  
used to shoot.  
This prevents any settings to be changed inadvertently, so it is  
convenient when you keep shooting with the same settings.  
Even with setting 1, if the power switch is set to <J>, you can use <6>,  
<5>, and <9> to change settings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
231  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn IV -11 Start movie shooting  
0: Default (from LV)  
1: Quick start (<I> button)  
If the [6 Live View/Movie func. set.] menu option has been set to  
enable movie shooting (p.142), press the <I> button to start shooting  
a movie immediately while the camera is ready to shoot.  
C.Fn IV -12 Focusing Screen  
If you change the focusing screen, change this setting to match the  
focusing screen type. This is to obtain the correct exposure.  
0: lEc-C IV  
Standard focusing screen (Laser-matte).  
1: lEc-A, B, C, C II, C III, D, H, I, L  
For Laser-matte screens.  
2: pEc-S  
For Super Precision Matte screens.  
3: kEc-N, R  
For New Laser-matte screens.  
About Super Precision Matte Ec-S and Maximum Lens Aperture  
  This focusing screen is optimzed for f/1.8 to f/2.8 lenses.  
  If the lens maximum aperture is brighter than f/1.8, the center spot  
metering circle and Area AF frame might become difficult to see.  
  Also, if the lens maximum aperture is slower than f/2.8, the viewfinder  
will look darker.  
  Since the Ec-A, Ec-B, Ec-I, and Ec-L focusing screens have a prism at  
the center, correct exposures cannot be obtained with evaluative  
metering and center spot metering. Use either center-weighted average  
metering or AF point-linked spot metering (except the center AF point).  
  To change the focusing screen, refer to the instructions that come with  
the focusing screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
232  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn IV -13 Timer length for timer  
How long the function setting remains in effect after you let go of the  
respective button can be changed.  
Disable: The timer length is set to the default.  
Enable: The timer length is set to the time set with [Register].  
Register: You can set the 6-sec. and 16-sec. timer length and the timer  
length after the shutter release. The timer length can be set to 0  
sec. to 59 sec. or 1 min. to 60 min. After entering the settings,  
select [Apply].  
• 6 sec. timer  
This timer length will apply to the AE lock started with the  
metering timer/<A> button.  
• 16 sec. timer  
This timer length will apply to mlti-spot metering and FE lock  
with the <I> button.  
• Timer after release  
Normally, the timeth s 2 sec. after the shutter release. A  
longer timer length ake it easier to keep using AE lock for  
the same eposure.  
C.Fn IV -14 Shortened release time lag  
Normally, stabilization control is executed for the shutter-release time lag.  
This stabilization control can be omitted to make the shutter-release time  
lag shorter.  
0: Disable  
1: Enable  
When the aperture is stopped down to no more than 3 stops from the  
maximum aperture, the shutter-release time lag will be as much as  
approx. 20% shorter than normal.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
233  
3 Custom Function Settings  
C.Fn IV -15 Add aspect ratio information  
During Live View and movie shooting, vertical lines corresponding to the  
aspect ratio will be displayed. You can thereby simulate still photo framing  
for medium- and large-format film sizes such as 6x6 cm, 6x4.5 cm, and 4x5  
in.  
This aspect ratio information will be appended automatically to the captured  
image. (The image will not be saved to the card as a cropped image.)  
When the image is transferred to a personal computer and Digital Photo  
Professional (provided software) is used, the image will be displayed in the  
aspect ratio you specified.  
0: Off  
4: Aspect ratio 6:7  
5: Aspect ratio 10:12  
6: Aspect ratio 5:7  
1: Aspect ratio 6:6  
2: Aspect ratio 3:4  
3: Aspect ratio 4:5  
  Aspect ratio information will also be appendeduring viewfinder  
shooting.  
  During image playback on the camerertical lines for the respective  
ratio will be displayed.  
C.Fn IV -16 Add image verification data  
0: Disable  
1: Enable  
Data for verifying whether the image is original or not is appended to the  
image automatically. When the shooting information of an image  
appended with the verification data is displayed (p.157), the <L> icon  
will appear.  
To verify whether the image is original, the Original Data Security Kit  
OSK-E3 (sold separately) is required.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
234  
3
Registering and Applying Custom Function Settings  
You can register up to three sets of Custom Function settings.  
You can register a different set of Custom Function settings for different  
shooting situations such as sports, snapshots, and landscapes.  
You can then instantly apply a registered set of Custom Function  
settings.  
Registering Custom Function Settings  
Select [C.Fn setting register/  
apply].  
  Under the [8] tab, select [C.Fn  
setting register/apply], then press  
<0>.  
1
Select [Register].  
2
  The <5> dial to select  
[Rgister], then press <0>.  
Select [Set].  
3
  Check the settings.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Set *],  
then press <0>.  
Select [OK].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],  
4
then press <0>.  
X The Custom Function settings will be  
registered under [Set *], and the  
Custom Function settings will be  
displayed in a list. To return to the  
screen in step 2, press <0>.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
235  
3Registering and Applying Custom Function Settings  
The settings for [8C.Fn I -16: AE Microadjustment], [8C.Fn I -17: FE  
Microadjustment], [8C.Fn III -7: AF Microadjustment], and [8C.Fn IV -  
12: Focusing Screen] will not be included in the registered Custom  
Function settings.  
To view the registered Custom Function settings, select [Confirm settings].  
The numbers of options changed from the default setting are displayed in  
blue. Also, non-numerical settings are displayed by a blue [*].  
Applying Custom Function Settings  
In step 2, select [Apply] and select the [Set *] of the Custom Function  
settings to be applied. Select [OK], and the Custom Function settings  
will switch to those registered under Set *.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
236  
3
Registering My Menu  
Under the My Menu tab, you can register up to six menu options and  
Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently.  
Select [My Menu settings].  
1
  Under the [9] tab, select [My Menu  
settings], then press <0>.  
Select [Register].  
2
  Turn the <5> dial to select  
[Register], then press <0>.  
Register the desired items.  
3
  Turn the <5> dial to select the item,  
then pres <0>.  
 
Oe conirmation dialog, select [OK  
]
anpress < > to register the item.  
0
ou can register up to six items in My  
Menu.  
  To return to the screen in step 2,  
press the <M> button.  
About My Menu settings  
  Sort  
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select  
[Sort] and select the item whose order you want to change. Then  
press <0>. With [z] displayed, turn the <5> dial to change the  
order, then press <0>.  
  Delete / Delete all items  
Deletes the registered items. [Delete] deletes one item at a time,  
and [Delete all items] deletes all items.  
  Display from My Menu  
When [Enable] is set, the [9] tab will be displayed first when you  
display the menu screen.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
237  
3
Saving and Loading Camera Settings  
The camera’s shooting modes, menus, Custom Functions, and other  
camera settings can be saved in the card as a camera settings file.  
When this file is loaded by the camera, the saved camera settings will  
be applied.  
Convenient when you want to load the camera settings from a different  
EOS-1D Mark IV body and set the camera in the same way. Or you can  
save and load different camera settings for different shooting situations.  
Saving Camera Settings  
Select [Save/load settings on  
media].  
  Under the [7] tab, select [Save/load  
settings on media], then press  
<0>.  
1
Select ave].  
  the <5> dial to select [Save],  
2
tpress <0>.  
Target media  
Select [Start].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select [Start],  
3
then press <0>.  
X The camera settings will be saved to  
the card, and the screen in step 2 will  
reappear.  
  If you select [Change file name], you  
can change the file name (8  
characters) and save the file.  
For the procedure, see “Changing the  
File Name” on page 86. The number  
of characters that can be entered will  
be different, but the procedure for  
entering the file name is the same.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
238  
3Saving and Loading Camera Settings  
Saved Settings  
  Shooting functions  
Shooting mode + setting, ISO speed, AF mode, AF point, Metering  
mode, Drive mode, Exposure compensation amount, Flash  
exposure compensation amount  
  Menu functions  
[1] White balance, Custom WB registration, WB SHIFT/BKT,  
Color space, Picture Style, Peripheral illumination correction  
[2] JPEG quality, Image size, Review time, Beep, Release  
shutter without card, External Speedlite control (Flash  
function settings)  
[4] Highlight alert, AF point display, Histogram, Enlarge display,  
Image jump w/6  
[5] Auto power off, Record func+meia/folder sel. (Recording  
function), File numberinge name setting, Auto rotate  
[6] LCD brightness, LiviewMovie function setting  
[7] Sensor cleaning (Aaning)  
[8] Custom Funcions  
[9] My Menu  
Loading Camera Settings  
In step 2, select [Load]. Up to ten camera settings files saved in the  
card will be displayed. When you select the desired file, it will be loaded  
and the settings will be applied to the camera.  
  The date/time, language, video system, and C.Fn I -16, C.Fn I -17, C.Fn  
III -7, C.Fn IV -12 settings will not be saved.  
  Up to ten camera settings files can be saved in a card. If the card already  
has ten camera settings files, you can either overwrite an existing file or  
use another card.  
  Camera settings files saved with a camera other than the EOS-1D Mark  
IV cannot be loaded.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
239  
3
Registering and Applying Basic Camera Settings  
You can set the basic settings of major functions such as the shooting mode,  
AF mode, metering mode, and drive mode and register them in the camera.  
This is convenient when you want to instantly switch to frequently-used  
shooting settings.  
Registering Basic Settings  
Select [Regist/apply basic  
settings].  
1
 
Under the [  
basic settings], then press <  
7
] tab, select [Regist/apply  
>.  
0
Select [Register].  
  Turn the <5> dial to select  
2
3
[Register], hen press <0>.  
Select uncion.  
  rn te <5> dial to select the  
ion, then press <0>.  
  Uto nine settings such as the  
shooting mode, white balance, and  
drive mode can be set.  
Set the function as desired.  
  Turn the <5> dial to select the  
desired setting, then press <0>.  
4
5
Exit the setting.  
 
To exit the setting and return to the screen  
in step 2, press the < > button.  
M
Applying Basic Settings  
In step 2, select [Apply]. The camera settings will switch to the registered settings.  
[Record func.] will also be set to [Standard], and the exposure  
compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, and WB correction/BKT  
will all be canceled.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
240  
Reference  
This chapter provides reference formation for camera  
features, system accessories, eThe back of this  
chapter also has an index ake it easier to look up  
needed information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
241  
Function Availability Table  
o: Set automatically k: User selectable  
: Not selectable/Disabled  
Viewfinder Shooting  
Function  
z LV  
Shooting  
k Movie  
Shooting  
d
s
k
k
k
k
f
k
k
k
k
a
k
k
k
k
Bulb  
JPEG  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Image size RAW  
(Still photo)  
k
RAW+JPEG  
k
Auto  
k
k
ISO speed  
Enabled in M  
movie mode  
Manual  
k
k
k
k
k
k
Standard  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Portrait  
Landscape  
Neutral  
Picture  
Style  
Faithful  
Monochrome  
User Defined  
Auto WB  
Preset WB  
Custom WB  
White  
balance  
Color temperature  
setting  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
WB correction  
WB-BKT  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
(Still photo)  
sRGB  
o*  
*
Color  
space  
Adobe RGB  
Auto Lighting Optimizer  
k
Lens peripheral illumination  
correction  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Long exposure noise reduction  
High ISO speed noise reduction  
Highlight tone priority  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
(Still photo)  
k
* Still photos will be shot with the color space set.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
242  
Function Availability Table  
: Not selectable/Invalid  
o: Set automatically k: User selectable  
Viewfinder Shooting  
z LV  
Shooting  
k Movie  
Shooting  
Function  
d
s
k
k
k
k
f
k
k
k
k
a
k
k
k
k
Bulb  
k
One-Shot  
AI Servo  
With f  
k
k
k
k
k
Auto  
k
AF point  
selection  
With f  
Manual  
k
AF  
Live mode  
k
k
k
k
u Live mode  
Before  
Quick mode  
k
o
shooting starts  
Evaluative  
Partial  
With c  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Metering  
Exposure  
Spot  
Center-weighted  
average  
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
Program shift  
k
k
Exposure  
compensation  
k
k
Other than M  
movie mode  
AE lock  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
AEB  
k
k
k
Depth-of-field preview  
Single shooting  
k
k
High-speed  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
continuous shooting  
(Still photo)  
(Still photo)  
Low-speed  
continuous shooting  
Drive  
10-sec. self-timer  
2-sec. self-timer  
Silent single shooting  
FE lock  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
External  
Speedlite Flash exposure  
k
k
k
k
k
k
compensation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
243  
System Map  
ST-E2  
270EX  
430EX II  
580EX II  
Macro Ring Lite  
MR-14EX  
Macro Twin Lite  
MT-24EX  
Bundled  
Accessories  
Dioptric Adjustment  
Lenses Eg  
Anti-Fog  
Eyepiece Eg  
Wide Strap  
L6  
Cable  
protector  
Eyecup Eg  
CR2025 lithium battery  
Angle Finder C  
EOS DIGITAL Software Instruction  
Hand Strap  
E1  
Solution Disk  
Manual  
Battery Pack LP-E4  
AC Adapter Kit  
ACK-E4  
Car Battery  
Cable  
CB-570  
Battery Charger  
LC-E4  
Focusing  
Screen Ec  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
244  
System Map  
Timer Remote  
Controller  
TC-80N3  
Remote  
Switch  
RS-80N3  
Wireless  
Controller  
LC-5  
EF lenses  
External microphone  
HDMI Cable HT100  
WirelTransitter  
WFT-A/B/C/D or  
WF-E2/E2A*  
Stereo AV Cable  
AVC-DC400ST  
TV/Video  
USB external media  
USB GPS unit  
Interface Cable  
IFC-200U  
Wireless LAN  
access point  
Interface Cable  
IFC-500U  
Wireless LAN adapter  
Ethernet port  
Personal  
computer  
Original Data  
Security Kit OSK-E3  
USB port  
Windows 7  
Windows Vista  
Windows XP  
Mac OS X  
PC card slot  
Card reader  
CF card  
PictBridge-compatible printer  
SD memory card PCMCIA adapter  
* WFT-E2/E2A: Firmware Ver. 2.0.0 or higher  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
245  
B Checking Camera Settings  
With [8C.Fn II -10: INFO. button when shooting] (p.217) set to [1:  
Displays camera settings], pressing the <B> button while the  
camera is ready to shoot will display image-related function settings.  
Display the camera settings.  
  While the camera is ready to shoot,  
press the <B> button.  
Picture Style (p.66)  
Picture Style parameters (p.67)  
Color space (p.92)  
WB correction (p.79)/  
BKT setting (p.80)  
Transfer of images failed*  
FE Microadjustment  
(p.213)  
File name setting (p.86)  
Date/Time (p.49)  
AE Microadjustment  
(p.213)  
Auto rotate display (p.182)  
Number of possible shots for f CF card and g SD card (p.61)  
AF Microadjustment (p.221)  
* Displayed only if Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E2 II A/B/C/D or WFT-E2/E2A is  
used and the transfer of some images failed.  
As the default setting, when you press the <B> button, the shooting  
function settings will be displayed (p.23).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
246  
3Checking the Battery Information  
You can check the battery’s condition on a menu screen.  
Select [Battery info.].  
  Under the [6] tab, select [Battery  
info.], then press <0>.  
The model of the battery or household  
power source (sold separately) being  
used is displayed.  
Next to the battery check (p.35), the  
remaining battery capacity is  
displayed in 1% increments.  
Shots taken with the current battery.  
he nmber is reset when the battery  
recharged.  
Battecharge performance level is displayed in  
one of three levels (p.29).  
(Green): Battery’s recharge performance is  
fine.  
(Green): Battery’s recharge performance is  
slightly degraded.  
(Red): Purchasing a new battery is recommended.  
Do not use any battery other than Battery Pack LP-E4. Otherwise, the  
camera’s full performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.  
  The shutter count is the number of still photos taken. (Movies are not  
counted.)  
  If [Calibration is recommended when charging battery next time] is  
displayed, see page 30.  
  If you set the power switch to <1/J> and communication with the  
battery is faulty for some reason, [Cannot communicate with battery]  
will be displayed. Select [OK] and you can continue shooting. In such a  
case, the <  
> battery check icon will light on the top LCD panel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
247  
Replacing the Date/Time Battery  
The date/time (back-up) battery’s service life is approx. 5 years. If the  
date/time is reset when camera is turned on, replace the back-up  
battery with a new CR2025 lithium battery as described below.  
The date/time setting will also be reset, so be sure to set the  
correct date/time (p.49).  
Set the power switch to <2>  
1
and remove the battery pack.  
  The back-up battery is on the ceiling  
of the battery compartment.  
Remove the back-up battery  
2 cover.  
  Use a small crewdriver to loosen the  
scred remove the cover.  
  e caful not to lose the cover and  
w.  
Remove the battery.  
3
Install a new back-up battery.  
  The plus side of the battery must face  
(+)  
4
up.  
Attach the cover.  
5
For the date/time battery, be sure to use a CR2025 lithium battery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
248  
Troubleshooting Guide  
If there is a problem, first refer to this Troubleshooting Guide on pages  
249 to 255. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,  
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.  
Power-Related Problems  
The battery cannot be recharged with the battery charger provided.  
  Do not recharge any battery pack other than a genuine Canon Battery  
Pack LP-E4.  
The battery charger’s <CAL/CHARGE> lamp blinks in red.  
The charger’s lamp blinks three times.  
  See pages 30 and 31.  
The camera does not operate even whe pwer switch is set to <  
1>.  
  The battery is not properltalld in the camera (p.32).  
  Recharge the battery (p.2
  Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.36).  
The access lamp still blinks even when the power switch is set to <  
2>.  
  If the power is cut off while an image is being recorded to the card, the  
access lamp will still continue to light/blink for a few seconds. When  
the image recording is completed, the power will turn off automatically.  
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.  
  Use a fully-charged battery (p.28).  
  The battery performance might have degraded. See the [6 Battery  
info.] menu option to check the battery’s performance level (p.247). If  
the battery’s performance level has degraded, purchase a new battery.  
  If you keep displaying the shooting function setting screen (p.23) or  
using Live View shooting or movie shooting (p.125, 141) for a  
prolonged period, the number of possible shots will decrease.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
249  
Troubleshooting Guide  
The camera turns off by itself.  
  Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take  
effect, set [5 Auto power off] to [Off].  
Shooting-Related Problems  
The lens cannot be attached.  
  The camera cannot be used with EF-S lenses (p.39).  
The card cannot be used.  
  If a card error message is displayed, see page 38 or 256.  
No images can be shot or record
  The card is not properly insep.3).  
  If you are using an SD card, swrite-protect switch upward (p.36).  
  If the card is full, replae the card or delete unnecessary images to  
make room (p.36, 179).  
  If you try to focus in One-Shot AF mode while the focus confirmation  
light <o> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be taken. Press the  
shutter button halfway again to focus, or focus manually (p.41, 95,  
100).  
The image is out of focus.  
  Set the lens focus mode switch to <AF> (p.39).  
  To prevent camera shake, hold the camera still and press the shutter  
button gently (p.40, 41).  
  If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
250  
Troubleshooting Guide  
A darker exposure was set with exposure  
compensation, but the image looks bright.  
  Set [8C.Fn II -4: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [3: Disable]. If it is set  
to [Standard/Low/Strong], the image might still come out bright even  
if you set a darker exposure with manual exposure, exposure  
compensation, or flash exposure compensation (p.81, 215).  
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.  
  Set [8C.Fn II -2: High ISO speed noise reduction] to one of the  
following settings: [Standard/Low/Disable]. If it is set to [Strong], the  
maximum burst will greatly decrease (p.214).  
  If you shoot a subject which has fine detail (field of grass, etc.), the file  
size will be larger and the actual maximm burst might be lower than  
the number mentioned on page .  
ISO 100 cannot be set.  
  If [8C.Fn II -3: Hihlight te priority] is set to [Enable], the  
settable ISO speed angstarts from ISO 200. If [Disable] is set, ISO  
100 can be set (p.215).  
When I use the <f> mode with flash, the shutter speed becomes slow.  
  If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed  
becomes slow automatically (slow-sync shooting) so that both the  
subject and background are properly exposed. If you do not want a  
slow shutter speed to be set, set [8C.Fn I -15: Flash sync. speed in  
Av mode] to 1 or 2 (p.212).  
The flash does not fire.  
  Make sure the flash (or PC sync cord) is securely attached to the  
camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
251  
Troubleshooting Guide  
The flash always fires at full output.  
  If you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedlite, the flash will  
always be fired at full output (p.120).  
  When the [Flash metering mode] flash Custom Function is set to  
[TTL (autoflash)], the flash will always be fired at full output (p.124).  
Flash exposure compensation cannot be set.  
 
If flash exposure compensation has already been set with the Speedlite,  
flash exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera. When the  
Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is canceled (set to 0), flash  
exposure compensation can be set with the camera.  
High-speed sync cannot be set in the Av mode.  
  Set [8C.Fn I -15: Flash sync. spin Amode] to [0: Auto]  
(p.212).  
Live View shooting is ot pole.  
 
For Live View shooting, use a memory card (a hard disk-type card is  
not recommended). A hard disk-type card requires a lower temperature  
range for operation than memory cards. If the temperature gets too  
high, the Live View shooting may stop temporarily to prevent damage  
to the card’s hard disk. When the camera’s internal temperature  
decreases, you can resume Live View shooting (p.139).  
During Live View shooting, the ISO speed, shutter speed, and  
aperture cannot be set.  
  Set [LV z/k set.] to [Stills] (p.126).  
The shutter makes two shooting sounds during Live View shooting.  
  During Live View shooting, the shutter will make two sounds when you  
take a picture (p.127).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
252  
Troubleshooting Guide  
Movies cannot be shot with manual exposure.  
  Set [LV z/k set.] to [Movies] and set the shooting mode to <a>  
(manual exposure) (p.142, 144).  
The movie shooting terminates by itself.  
  If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop  
automatically. If you use a CF card, use one with a read/write speed of  
at least 8 MB per sec. If you use an SD card, use one with SD Speed  
Class 6 “  
” or higher. To find out the card’s read/write speed,  
see the card manufacturer’s Web site, etc.  
  If the movie file size reaches 4 GB or if the movie recording time  
reaches 29 min. 59 sec., movie shooting will stop automatically.  
The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.  
  During movie shooting, if yu mthe camera left or right quickly  
(high-speed panning) or moving subject, the image might look  
distorted. There mght be listortion if you shoot in the 1280x720  
or 640x480 movie rcorng size (p.151).  
When I shoot still photos during movie shooting,  
the movie shooting stops.  
  To shoot still photos during movie shooting, using a CF card  
compatible with UDMA transfer rates is recommended.  
  Setting a smaller image size for still photos and shooting fewer  
continuous still photos can also resolve the problem.  
The movie cannot play.  
  Movies edited with a personal computer using the provided software,  
etc., cannot be played with the camera.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
253  
Troubleshooting Guide  
When the movie is played, camera operation noise can be heard.  
  If you operate the camera’s dial or lens during movie shooting, the  
respective operation noise will also be recorded. Using an external  
microphone (commercially available) is recommended (p.153).  
Display & Operation Problems  
The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.  
  If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.  
  In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow  
or might look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.  
Part of the image blinks in black.  
  The [4 Highlight alert] menu opset o [Enable] (p.157).  
A red box is displayed on thge.  
  The [4 AF point dis.] menu option is set to [Enable] (p.158).  
The image cannot be erased.  
  If the image has been protected, it cannot be erased (p.172).  
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).  
  Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character  
will be an underscore (p.92).  
The fourth character in the file name changes.  
  With the [5 File name setting] menu option, select the camera’s  
unique file name or the file name registered under User setting 1  
(p.86).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
254  
Troubleshooting Guide  
The file numbering does not start from 0001.  
  If you use a card which already has images recorded, the file  
numbering might start from the last image in the card (p.88).  
The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.  
  The correct date and time has not been set (p.49).  
No image appears on the TV screen.  
  Make sure the stereo AV cable or HDMI cable’s plug is connected all  
the way in (p.170, 171).  
  Set the video OUT format (NTSC/PAL) to the same video format as  
the TV (p.170).  
  Use the stereo AV cable that came wth he camera (p.170).  
The voice memo cannot bplad.  
  Set [8C.Fn IV -9: Hfunction] to [2: Play memo (hold:  
Record memo)] (p175, 231).  
Sensor Cleaning Problems  
The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning.  
  If you selected [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a noise three  
times (p.184).  
Printing-Related Problems  
There are fewer printing effects than listed in the instruction manual.  
  What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer. This  
instruction manual lists all the printing effects available (p.194).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
255  
Error Codes  
If there is a problem with the camera, an  
error message will appear. Follow the on-  
screen instructions.  
Error No.  
Countermeasures  
No.  
Error Message & Solution  
Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the  
lens contacts.  
01  
02  
Î Clean the electrical contacts on the aera and lens and use a  
Canon lens. (p.13, 16)  
Card * cannot be accesseeinrt/change card * or format card  
* with camera.  
Î Remove and insll the card again, replace the card, or format the  
card (p.36, 50).  
Cannot save images because card * is full. Replace card *.  
04  
06  
Î Replace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card  
(p.36, 179, 50).  
Sensor cleaning is not possible. Turn the camera off and on  
again.  
Î Operate the power switch (p.34).  
10, 20, Shooting is not possible due to an error. Turn the camera off and  
30, 40,  
50, 60,  
70, 80,  
99  
on again or re-install the battery.  
Î Operate the power switch, remove and install the battery pack  
again, or use a Canon lens (p.34, 32).  
* If the error still persists, write down the error No. and contact your nearest  
Canon Service Center.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
256  
Specifications  
• Type  
Type:  
Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera  
Recording media:  
CF card (Type I or II, UDMA-compatible), SD memory  
card, SDHC memory card  
* With Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E2 II A/B/C/D or  
WFT-E2/E2A (with firmware Ver. 2.0.0 or higher),  
recording to USB external media possible  
27.9 x 18.6 mm  
Canon EF lenses (except EF-S lenses)  
(35mm-equivalent focal length is approx.1.3 times the  
lens focal length)  
Image sensor size:  
Compatible lenses:  
Lens mount:  
Canon EF mount  
• Image Sensor  
Type:  
CMOS sensor  
Effective pixels:  
Aspect ratio:  
Approx. 16.10 megapixels  
3:2  
Dust delete feature:  
Auto, Manual, Dt Dele Data appending  
• Recording System  
Recording format:  
Image type:  
Design rCamera File System 2.0  
JEG, RA-bit Canon original)  
RW+JPEG simultaneous recording possible  
Recorded pixels:  
Large  
: Approx. 16.00 megapixels (4896 x 3264)  
Medium 1: Approx. 12.40 megapixels (4320 x 2880)  
Medium 2: Approx. 8.40 megapixels (3552 x 2368)  
Small  
RAW  
: Approx. 4.00 megapixels (2448 x 1632)  
: Approx. 16.00 megapixels (4896 x 3264)  
M-RAW : Approx. 9.00 megapixels (3672 x 2448)  
S-RAW : Approx. 4.00 megapixels (2448 x 1632)  
Standard, Auto switch media, Rec. separately, Rec. to  
multiple  
Recording function:  
Create/select a folder: Possible  
File name:  
File numbering:  
Preset code, User setting 1, User setting 2  
Consecutive numbering, auto reset, manual reset  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
257  
Specifications  
• Image Processing  
Picture Style:  
Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral, Faithful,  
Monochrome, User Def. 1 - 3  
White balance:  
Auto, Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light,  
White fluorescent light, Flash), Custom (total 5 settings),  
Color temperature setting (2500-10000K), personal white  
balance (total 5 settings)  
White balance correction and white balance bracketing  
features provided  
* Color temperature information transmission enabled  
Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots  
Noise reduction:  
Automatic image  
brightness correction: Auto Lighting Optimizer  
Highlight tone priority: Provided  
Lens peripheral  
illumination correction: Provided  
• Viewfinder  
Type:  
Eye-level pentapris
Coverage:  
Magnification:  
Eye point:  
Vertical/Horaprox. 100%  
Apprx. 0.76-1 diopter with 50mm lens at infinity)  
Approx. 20 mm (From eyepiece lens center at -1 m-1  
)
Built-in dioptric  
adjustment:  
Eyepiece shutter:  
Focusing screen:  
Mirror:  
-3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)  
Built-in  
Ec-C IV provided, interchangeable  
Quick-return type  
Depth-of-field preview: Provided  
• Autofocus  
Type:  
TTL secondary image-registration, phase detection  
AF points:  
45 points (39 cross-type points + 6 points)  
EV -1 - 18 (at 23°C/73°F, ISO 100)  
One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, Manual focusing (MF)  
Emitted by the dedicated external Speedlite  
Enabled with AF Microadjustment  
Metering range:  
Focus modes:  
AF-assist beam:  
AF fine adjustment:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
258  
Specifications  
• Exposure Control  
Metering modes:  
63-zone TTL full-aperture metering  
Evaluative metering (linkable to any AF point)  
Partial metering (approx. 13.5% of viewfinder at center)  
Spot metering (approx. 3.8% of viewfinder at center)  
Center-weighted average metering  
Metering range:  
Exposure control:  
EV 0 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens,  
ISO 100)  
Program AE, shutter-priority AE, aperture-priority AE,  
manual exposure, bulb exposure  
ISO speed:  
(Recommended  
exposure index)  
Auto (ISO Auto), manual setting within ISO 100 - 12800  
(1/3- or whole-stop increments) and expandable to L (ISO  
50), H1 (ISO 25600), H2 (ISO 51200), H3 (ISO 102400)  
Exposure compensation: Manual and AEB (Settable in combination with manual  
exposure compensation)  
Settable amount: ±3 stopin 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments  
AE lock:  
Auto: Applied in One-ShAF mode with evaluative  
metering focus s achieved  
Manual: lobutton  
Standard exposure  
level adjustment:  
AMicroatment possible  
• Shutter  
Type:  
Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter  
Shutter speeds:  
1/8000 sec. to 30 sec., bulb (Total shutter speed range.  
Available range varies by shooting mode.)  
X-sync at 1/300 sec. (with EOS-dedicated external Speedlite)  
• Drive System  
Drive modes:  
Single, High-speed continuous, Low-speed continuous, 10-  
sec. self-timer, 2-sec. self-timer, and Silent single shooting  
Max. approx. 10 shots/sec.  
Continuous shooting speed  
:
Max. burst:  
JPEG Large: Approx. 85 shots (Approx. 121 shots)  
RAW: Approx. 26 shots (Approx. 28 shots)  
RAW+JPEG Large: Approx. 20 shots (Approx. 20 shots)  
*
Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards  
High-speed continuous, JPEG quality: 8, ISO 100, and  
Standard Picture Style) and a 4GB card.  
(
* Figures in parentheses apply to an Ultra DMA (UDMA)  
mode 6 16GB card based on Canon’s testing standards  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
259  
Specifications  
• External Speedlite  
Compatible flash:  
Flash metering:  
Flash exposure  
compensation:  
EX-series Speedlite (Functions settable with the camera)  
E-TTL II autoflash  
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments  
FE lock:  
PC terminal:  
Provided  
Provided  
Standard flash exposure  
level adjustment:  
FE Microadjustment possible  
• Live View Shooting  
Focusing:  
Live mode, Face detection Live mode (Contrast  
detection), Quick mode (Phase-difference detection)  
Manual focusing (5x/10x magnification possible)  
Evaluative metering with the image sensor  
EV 0 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens,  
ISO 100)  
Metering modes:  
Metering range:  
Grid display:  
Two types  
• Movie Shooting  
Movie compression:  
MPEG-4 AV4  
Variale (averbit rate  
Audio recording format: Linear PCM  
Recording format:  
Recording size  
and frame rate:  
MOV  
1920x1080 (Full HD): 30p/25p/24p  
1280x720 (HD)  
640x480 (SD)  
: 60p/50p  
: 60p/50p  
* 30p: 29.97 fps, 25p: 25.0 fps, 24p: 23.976 fps, 60p:  
59.94 fps, 50p: 50.0 fps  
File size:  
1920x1080 (30p/25p/24p): Approx. 330 MB/min.  
1280x720 (60p/50p)  
640x480 (60p/50p)  
: Approx. 330 MB/min.  
: Approx. 165 MB/min.  
Focusing:  
Metering modes:  
Same as focusing with Live View shooting  
Center-weighted average and evaluative metering with  
the image sensor  
* Automatically set by the focusing mode  
EV 0 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens, ISO 100)  
Program AE (exposure compensation possible) for  
movies and manual exposure  
Metering range:  
Exposure control:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
260  
Specifications  
ISO speed:  
During autoexposure shooting: Automatically set  
During manual exposure shooting:  
Auto (ISO Auto), manual setting within ISO 100 - 12800  
(1/3- or whole-stop increments) and expandable to H1  
(ISO 25600), H2 (ISO 51200), H3 (ISO 102400)  
Built-in monaural microphone  
External stereo microphone terminal provided  
Two types  
Sound recording:  
Grid display:  
• LCD Monitor  
Type:  
TFT color liquid-crystal monitor  
Monitor size and dots: 3-in. with approx. 920,000 dots (VGA)  
Coverage: Approx. 100%  
Brightness adjustment: Manual (7 levels)  
Interface language:  
25  
• Image Playback  
Image display formats: Single, Single + Ifo (Imge size, shooting information,  
histogram), 4-imindex9-image index, image rotate  
possible  
Zoom magnification:  
Approx. 0x  
Image browsing methods: Sngle imagjump by 10 or 100 images, by shooting  
dat, by folder, movies only, stills only  
Highlight alert:  
AF point display:  
Slide show:  
Image protect:  
Copying images:  
Backup:  
Overexposed highlights blink  
Possible  
All images, by folder, by date, movies, or stills  
Possible  
Possible  
With Wireless File Transmitter WFT-E2 II A/B/C/D or  
WFT-E2/E2A (with firmware Ver. 2.0.0 or higher),  
backing up to external media possible  
Recording/playback possible  
Enabled (LCD monitor, video/audio OUT, HDMI OUT)  
Built-in speaker  
Voice memo:  
Movie playback:  
• Direct Printing  
Compatible printers:  
Printable images:  
Print ordering:  
PictBridge-compatible printers  
JPEG and RAW images  
DPOF Version 1.1 compatible  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
261  
Specifications  
• Custom Functions  
Custom Functions:  
62 under C.Fn I to IV  
C.Fn setting registration: Three sets can be registered  
Save camera settings: Up to ten sets can be registered in a card  
Register basic camera  
settings:  
Up to nine settings can be set  
My Menu registration: Up to six options can be registered  
Copyright information: Entry and inclusion enabled  
• Interface  
Audio/video OUT/  
Digital terminal:  
Analog video (Compatible with NTSC/PAL)/stereo audio  
output  
For personal computer communication and direct printing  
(Hi-Speed USB equivalent)  
HDMI mini OUT terminal: Type C (Auto switching of resolution)  
External microphone  
IN terminal:  
3.5mm dia. stereo -jack  
Remote control terminal: Compatible with N3e remote control  
System extension terminal:Connects to ss File Transmitter WFT-E2 II A/B/C/D  
or WFT-E2/Eth firmware version 2.0.0 or higher)  
• Power Source  
Battery:  
Battery Pack LP-E4 (Quantity 1)  
* AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK-E4  
(sold separately)  
Battery information:  
Battery life:  
Six-level battery check, remaining capacity, shutter  
count, and performance can be checked  
With viewfinder shooting:  
Approx. 1500 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 1200 shots at  
0°C/32°F  
With Live View shooting:  
Approx. 270 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 230 shots at  
0°C/32°F  
* Based on CIPA testing standards  
Maximum movie  
shooting time:  
Approx. 2 hr. 40 min. total at 23°C/73°F  
Approx. 2 hr. 20 min. total at 0°C/32°F  
* With fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E4  
One CR2025 lithium battery  
Date/Time battery:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
262  
Specifications  
• Dimensions and Weight  
Dimensions (W x H x D): 156 x 156.6 x 79.9 mm / 6.1 x 6.2 x 3.1 in.  
Weight:  
Approx. 1180 g / 41.6 oz. (body only)  
• Operation Environment  
Working temperature range: 0°C - 45°C / 32°F - 113°F  
Working humidity:  
85% or less  
• Battery Pack LP-E4  
Type:  
Rated voltage:  
Battery capacity:  
Rechargeable lithium ion battery  
11.1 V DC  
2300 mAh  
Dimensions (W x H x D): 68.4 x 34.2 x 92.8 mm / 2.7 x 1.3 x 3.7 in.  
Weight: Approx. 180 g / 6.3 oz. (excluding protective cover)  
• Battery Charger LC-E4  
Type:  
Charger dedicated to the Battery Pack LP-E4  
Recharging time:  
Rated input:  
Approx. 120 min. (fo1 ack)  
100 - 240 V AC 60 H)  
12 V / 24 V DC  
Rated output:  
12.6 V D5A  
Power cord length:  
Aprox. 2 6 ft.  
Working temperature range: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F  
Working humidity: 85% or ess  
Dimensions (W x H x D): 155 x 52.3 x 95 mm / 6.1 x 2.1 x 3.7 in.  
Weight: Approx. 340 g / 12.0 oz. (excluding power cord and  
protective covers)  
  All specifications above are based on Canon’s testing standards.  
  Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.  
  If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the  
respective lens maker.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
263  
Trademarks  
  Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
  Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and other countries.  
  Macintosh and Mac OS is a trademark or registered trademark of Apple Inc. in  
the United States and other countries.  
  CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.  
  The SDHC logo is a trademark.  
  HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are a trademark or  
registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
  All other corporate and product names and trademarks mentioned in this  
manual are the property of their respective owners.  
*
This digital camera supports Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 and Exif  
2.21 (also called “Exif Print”). Exif Print is a standrd that enhances  
compatibility between digital cameras and printrBy connecting the camera  
to an Exif Print-compliant printer, the shoinfomation is incorporated to  
optimize the print output.  
About MPEG-4 Licensing  
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be  
used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video  
that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a  
video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.  
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”  
* Notice displayed in English as required.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
264  
CAUTION  
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.  
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.  
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended  
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with  
genuine Canon accessories. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this  
product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-  
genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery  
pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the  
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request  
such repairs on a chargeable basis.  
Image Conversion Factor  
Since the image sensor size is  
smaller than the 35mm film  
Image sensor size  
(27.9 x 18.6 mm / 1.10 x 0.73 in.)  
format, it will look like the lens  
focal length is increased by 1.3x.  
35mm image size  
(36 x 24 mm / 1.42 x 0.94 in.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
265  
Safety Warnings  
Follow these safeguards and use the equipment properly to prevent injury, death,  
and material damage.  
Preventing Serious Injury or Death  
To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, and explosions, follow the  
safeguards below:  
- Do not use any batteries, power sources, and accessories not specified in this  
booklet. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries.  
- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery pack or back-up battery. Do  
not apply heat or apply solder to the battery pack or back-up battery. Do not expose  
the battery pack or back-up battery to fire or water. And do not subject the battery  
pack or back-up battery to strong physical shock.  
- Do not install the battery pack or back-up battery in reversed polarity (+ –). Do not  
mix new and old or different types of batteries.  
- Do not recharge the battery pack outside the allowable ambient temperature range  
of 0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F). Also, do not exceed the recharging time.  
- Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,  
accessories, connecting cables, etc.  
• Keep the back-up battery away from children. If a chilwallows the battery, consult a  
physician immediately. (Battery chemicals mm thstomach and intestines.)  
• When disposing of a battery pack or bup bery, insulate the electrical contacts  
with tape to prevent contact with othec ojects or batteries. This is to prevent  
fire or an explosion.  
• If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted during battery pack recharging,  
immediately unplug the battery chargr from the power outlet to stop the recharging  
and prevent a fire.  
• If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or  
fumes, remove it immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process.  
• Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can  
cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or  
clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a  
physician immediately.  
• During the recharging, keep the equipment away from the reach of children. The cord  
can accidentally choke the child or give an electrical shock.  
• Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the  
insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.  
• Do not fire the flash at someone driving a car. It may cause an accident.  
• Do not fire the flash near a person’s eyes. It may impair the person’s vision. When  
using flash to photograph an infant, keep at least 1 meter away.  
• Before storing the camera or accessory when not in use, remove the battery pack and  
disconnect the power plug. This is to prevent electrical shock, heat generation, and  
fire.  
• Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an  
explosion or fire.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
266  
• If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts, do  
not touch the internal parts due to the possibility of electrical shock.  
• Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause  
electrical shock.  
• Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens.  
Doing so may damage your vision.  
• Keep the camera from the reach of small children. The neck strap can accidentally  
choke the child.  
• Do not store the equipment in dusty or humid places. This is to prevent fire and  
electrical shock.  
• Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.  
Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s  
instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.  
To prevent fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:  
- Always insert the power plug all the way in.  
- Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.  
- When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.  
- Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the coror put a heavy object on the cord.  
Also do not twist or tie the cords.  
- Do not connect too many power plugs to e sampower outlet.  
- Do not use a cord whose insulation has damged.  
• Occasionally unplug the power plusa dry cloth to clean off the dust around  
the power outlet. If the surroundiny, humid, or oily, the dust on the power outlet  
may become moist and shrt-circuiutlet to cause a fire.  
Preventing Injury or Equiment Damage  
• Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source. The  
equipment may become hot and cause skin burns.  
• Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause  
injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.  
• Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun without the lens cap  
attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.  
• Do not cover or wrap the battery-recharging apparatus with a cloth. Doing so may trap  
heat within and cause the casing to deform or catch fire.  
• If you drop the camera in water or if water or metal fragments enter inside the camera,  
promptly remove the battery pack and back-up battery. This is to prevent fire and  
electrical shock.  
• Do not use or leave the battery pack or back-up battery in a hot environment. Doing so  
may cause battery leakage or a shorter battery life. The battery pack or back-up  
battery can also become hot and cause skin burns.  
• Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the equipment.  
Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.  
If the product does not work properly or requires repair, contact  
your dealer or your nearest Canon Service Center.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
267  
Digital Camera Model DS126211 Systems  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,  
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for  
class B digital devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These  
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses  
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to  
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference  
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be  
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged  
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
— Increase the separation between the equment and receiver.  
— Connect the equipment into an on a rcuit different from  
that to which the receiver is conned.  
Consult the dealer or an exceradio/TV technician for help.  
The cable with the ferrite core providh the digital camera must be used  
with this equipment in order comply th Class B limits in Subpart B of Part  
15 of the FCC rules.  
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise  
specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you  
could be required to stop operation of the equipment.  
Canon U.S.A. Inc.  
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.  
Tel No. (516)328-5600  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
When connecting to and using a household power outlet, use only AC  
Adapter Kit ACK-E4 (rated input: 100-240 V AC 50/60 Hz, rated output:  
12.6 V DC). Using anything else can cause fire, overheating, or  
electrical shock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
268  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS  
1. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS — This manual contains important safety  
and operating instructions for Battery Charger LC-E4.  
2. Before using the charger, read all instructions and cautionary remarks on  
(1) the charger, (2) the battery pack, and (3) the product using the battery  
pack.  
3. CAUTION To reduce risk of injury, charge only the Battery Pack LP-E4.  
Other types of batteries may burst, causing personal injury and other  
damage.  
4. Do not expose the charger to rain or snow.  
5. Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by Canon may result in  
fire, electric shock, or personal injury.  
6. To reduce risk of damage to electric plug and cord, pull by plug rather than  
by cord when disconnecting charger.  
7. Make sure cord is located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or  
otherwise subjected to damage or stress.  
8. Do not operate the charger with damaged cord or plug - replace them  
immediately.  
9. Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped,  
or otherwise damaged in any way; take it to a qualified serviceman.  
10. Do not disassemble the charger; take it to ualified serviceman when  
service or repair is required. Incorrassembly may result in a risk of  
electric shock or fire.  
11. To reduce risk of electric shplug charger from outlet before  
attempting any maintenance ning.  
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION  
Unless otherwise stated in his manual, there are no user serviceable parts  
inside. Refer servicing to qualified serviceman.  
USA and Canada only:  
The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is  
recyclable. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on  
how to recycle this battery.  
For CA, USA only  
Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material – special handling may  
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
269  
Index  
10-sec. or 2-sec. delay .................102  
1280x720......................................151  
1920x1080....................................151  
1st-curtain sync.............................122  
2nd-curtain sync ...........................122  
4- or 9-image index display...........159  
640x480........................................151  
Automatic selection (AF)................ 97  
Av (Aperture-priority AE).............. 110  
B
B/W .......................................... 67, 69  
Battery J Power  
Battery check ......................... 35, 247  
Beeper............................................ 52  
Black-and-white (printing) ............ 194  
Black-and-white image............. 67, 69  
Borders (Bordered/Borderless) .... 193  
Bracketing ...................... 80, 114, 209  
A
About servicing .............................265  
AC Adapter Kit................................33  
AC power........................................33  
Access lamp .............................19, 38  
Adobe RGB.....................................92  
AE lock..........................115, 212, 227  
AE Microadjustment......................213  
AEB.......................................114, 209  
AF J Focusing  
Bulb.............................................. 116  
Noise reduction........................ 214  
Bulb exposures ............................ 116  
C
...................... 3, 163, 170, 171  
Cale protector............................... 26  
AF Microadjustment......................22
AF point expansion.....................222  
AF start button ...............................1  
AF stop button ..............................220  
amera  
Camera shake ......................... 118  
Clear camera settings................ 53  
Holding the camera.................... 40  
Settings display........................ 246  
AI SERVO (AI Servo AF)................96  
Operation characteristics..........218  
Subject tracking sensitivity .......218  
Tracking method.......................219  
Camera shake................................ 41  
Camera shooting-ready............ 41, 45  
Caption (name) .............................. 76  
Aperture-priority AE ......................110  
Aspect ratio information................234  
Auto ISO .........................................65  
Auto Lighting Optimizer ..........81, 215  
Auto playback (Slide show) ..........168  
Auto power off...........................34, 52  
Auto reset .......................................89  
Auto rotate of vertical images .......182  
Auto switch media...........................57  
Autofocus J Focusing  
Card ................................... 13, 36, 50  
Card reminder............................ 52  
Format ....................................... 50  
Problem ..................................... 38  
Center-weighted average  
metering ....................................... 104  
CF card J Card  
Cleaning....................................... 184  
Clear camera settings .................... 53  
Clock .............................................. 49  
Color space.................................... 92  
Automatic cleaning .......................184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
270  
Index  
Color temperature setting ...............78  
Color tone ...............................68, 196  
Compression rate............................63  
Continuous......................................88  
Continuous shooting .....................101  
Contrast ..................................68, 196  
Cool tone (printing) .......................194  
Copyright information......................90  
Cord ..........................3, 163, 170, 171  
Cross-type focusing ........................99  
Exposure simulation..................... 130  
EX-series Speedlite...................... 119  
Extension........................................ 87  
External media ......................... 22, 46  
External Speedlite J Flash  
Eyecup ........................................... 40  
Eyepiece shutter........................... 117  
F
Faithful............................................ 67  
FE lock ......................................... 119  
FE Microadjustment ..................... 213  
FEB .............................................. 123  
File name........................................ 86  
File number .................................... 88  
Filse .......................... 61, 152, 157  
lter efect (Monochrome) ............. 69  
Firmware Ver. ................................. 48  
Custom Functions.........................204  
Clear all ....................................204  
Settings registration..................235  
Custom WB.....................................73  
D
Date/Time .......................................49  
Date/time battery replacement....248  
DC coupler..................................
Default (printing) ..........................
Depth-of-field preview................111  
lash  
Custom Functions.................... 124  
External Speedlite............ 119, 120  
FE lock..................................... 119  
Flash exposure compensation ... 119  
Shutter sync. (1st/2nd curtain) ... 122  
Flash-sync speed............. 120, 212  
Function settings...................... 121  
Non-Canon flash units ............. 120  
Dial  
Main Dial.....................................42  
Quick Control Dial.......................43  
Digital terminal ..............................190  
Dioptric adjustment .........................40  
Direct printing J Printing  
Flash exposure compensation ..... 119  
Flash mode................................... 122  
Flash-sync contacts........................ 17  
Focus confirmation light ................. 95  
Focus lock ...................................... 95  
Focus mode switch......... 39, 100, 138  
Focus tracking................................ 96  
DPOF............................................199  
Drive mode....................................101  
Dust Delete Data...........................185  
E
Erase (image) ...............................179  
Error codes ...................................256  
E-TTL II flash metering .........123, 215  
Evaluative metering ......................104  
Exposure compensation ...............113  
Exposure level increments............208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
271  
Index  
Focusing  
AF mode.....................................94  
Image  
AF point display ....................... 158  
AF point display........................158  
AF point selection.......................97  
AF-assist beam ........................225  
Beeper........................................52  
Difficult-to-focus subjects....100, 135  
Live View shooting ...........131, 138  
Manual focusing ...............100, 138  
Out of focus......................100, 135  
Recompose ................................95  
Focusing screen ...........................232  
Folder Create/Select.......................84  
Format (card initialization) ..............50  
Frame rate ....................................151  
Full HD..........................................141  
Full High-Definition .......151, 163, 171  
Function availability table..............242  
Auto playback .......................... 168  
Auto rotate ............................... 182  
Backup....................................... 46  
Copying.................................... 176  
Erase ....................................... 179  
Highlight alert........................... 157  
Histogram ................................ 158  
Index........................................ 159  
Jump display  
(Image browsing)..................... 160  
Magnified view......................... 161  
Manual rotate........................... 162  
Playback .................................. 156  
Protect ..................................... 172  
Shootig information .. 128, 148, 157  
VieoTV ...................... 163, 170  
e are................................... 265  
Imge browsing (Jump display) ... 160  
mae dust prevention............ 27, 183  
Image review time........................ 181  
G
Grid display...........................130, 15
H
Image size...................................... 59  
Appended automatically ............ 87  
Image verification data................. 234  
Image-recording quality.................. 59  
Index display ................................ 159  
ISO speed ...................... 64, 146, 208  
Automatic setting (Auto) ............ 65  
ISO expansion ......................... 208  
Hand strap E1.................................26  
HDMI.....................................163, 171  
High ISO speed noise reduction...214  
High-Definition ..............151, 163, 171  
Highlight alert................................157  
Highlight detail loss.......................157  
Highlight tone priority....................215  
High-speed continuous shooting ..101  
Histogram (Brightness/RGB) ........158  
Hot shoe .........................................17  
Household power............................33  
J
JPEG.............................................. 59  
Jump display (Image browsing) ... 160  
L
I
Landscape...................................... 66  
Language ....................................... 49  
Large (Image size) ......................... 60  
Laser-matte.................................. 232  
ICC profile.......................................92  
Illumination (LCD panel) ...............116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
272  
Index  
LCD monitor..............................13, 17  
Brightness adjustment..............180  
Image playback ........................156  
Menu screen.........................44, 46  
Shooting settings display....23, 217  
Menu  
Menu settings............................. 46  
My Menu .................................. 237  
Setting operation........................ 45  
3icon......................................... 4  
Metered manual flash................... 124  
Metering mode ..................... 104, 211  
Metering timer .............. 130, 152, 233  
MF (Manual focusing)........... 100, 138  
LCD panel.................................21, 22  
Illumination ...............................116  
Lens  
Attaching/Detaching ...................39  
Peripheral illumination  
correction....................................82  
Microphone  
(Built-in/External).... 19, 143, 152, 174  
Live View shooting........................125  
Exposure simulation .................130  
Face detection Live mode ........132  
Grid display...............................130  
Information display ...................128  
Live mode.................................131  
Manual focusing .......................138  
Movie shooting .........................141  
Possible shots ........................
Quick mode ............................
Mirror lockup................................. 118  
Monochrome image.................. 67, 69  
Movie............................................ 141  
Autoexposure shooting ............ 143  
Enoying ................................... 163  
Filsize.................................... 152  
Firstast scene trimming.......... 167  
Focusing .................................. 143  
Frame rate ............................... 151  
Information display................... 148  
Manual exposure shooting....... 144  
Playback .................................. 165  
Recording size ......................... 151  
Shooting preparation................ 142  
Sound recording....................... 152  
Still photo shooting................... 149  
View on TV....................... 163, 170  
Long exposure noise redution.....2
Low level format...........................51  
Low-speed continuous shooting ...101  
LV z/k setting..................126, 142  
M
M (Manual exposure)............112, 144  
Magnified view ......................138, 161  
Main Dial (6) ...............................42  
Manual exposure ..........................112  
Manual focusing....................100, 138  
Manual reset ...................................89  
Manual selection (AF).....................97  
Maximum aperture f/stop (AF) ........98  
Maximum burst .........................61, 62  
Medium (Image size) ......................60  
Medium RAW............................59, 62  
Memory card J Card  
M-RAW (Medium RAW) ........... 59, 62  
Multi-controller (9).................. 42, 97  
Multi-spot metering....................... 105  
My Menu....................................... 237  
N
Natural/M (printing)....................... 194  
Neutral............................................ 67  
Noise reduction ............................ 214  
Nomenclature................................. 16  
NR (printing)................................. 194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
273  
Index  
NTSC....................................151, 170  
Number of AF points.....................223  
Printing......................................... 189  
Page layout.............................. 193  
Paper settings.......................... 192  
PictBridge ................................ 189  
Print Order (DPOF).................. 199  
Printing effects ................. 194, 196  
Tilt correction ........................... 197  
Trimming.................................. 197  
O
ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF).............95  
One-Shot AF...................................95  
P
P (Program AE) ............................106  
PAL .......................................151, 170  
Paper settings (printing)................192  
Partial metering.............................104  
PC terminal...................................120  
Peripheral illumination correction....82  
Personal white balance...................72  
PictBridge .....................................189  
Picture Style..............................66, 71  
Pixels ..............................................60  
Playback J Image  
Program AE.................................. 106  
Program shift ........................... 107  
Protect.......................................... 172  
Q
Quick Control Dial (5) ............ 34, 43  
Quick mode.................................. 136  
R
RAW..................................... 59, 62  
+JPE................................... 60  
R. separately .............................. 57  
ec. to multiple .............................. 57  
Recharge........................................ 28  
Recording func............................... 57  
Registered AF point ..................... 224  
Portrait ...........................................6
Possible shots...................35, 1, 129  
Power  
Auto power off ............................52  
Battery check......................35, 247  
Battery info. ..............................247  
Calibration ..................................30  
Household power .......................33  
Possible shots ..............35, 61, 129  
Recharge....................................28  
Recharge performance.............247  
Switch.........................................34  
Registering basic camera  
settings......................................... 240  
Release shutter without card.......... 52  
Remote Switch............................. 117  
Rotate (image) ..................... 162, 182  
S
Safety shift ................................... 210  
Safety warnings............................ 266  
Saturation............................... 68, 196  
Saving camera settings................ 238  
SD card J Card  
Precision matte.............................232  
Pressing completely........................41  
Pressing halfway.............................41  
Self-timer...................................... 102  
Sensor cleaning ........... 183, 184, 187  
Sepia (Monochrome)...................... 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
274  
Index  
0 button........................................44  
Trimming (printing) ....................... 197  
Tripod socket.................................. 16  
Troubleshooting............................ 249  
Tv (Shutter-priority AE)................. 108  
Sharpness.......................................68  
Shooting information  
display...........................128, 148, 157  
Shooting mode................................21  
Aperture-priority AE..................110  
Bulb ..........................................116  
Manual exposure......................112  
Program AE..............................106  
Shutter-priority AE ....................108  
U
Ultra DMA (UDMA)................. 37, 150  
USB (Digital) terminal................... 190  
User defined............................. 70, 86  
V
Shooting settings display ........23, 217  
Shortened (time lag) .....................233  
Shutter button .................................41  
Shutter sync..................................122  
Shutter-priority AE.........................108  
Silent shooting ..............................101  
Silent single shooting....................101  
Single image display.....................156  
Single shooting ...........................
Slide show...................................
Small (Image size) ......................59  
Small RAW................................59, 62  
Specifications................................257  
Spot metering................................104  
S-RAW (Small RAW) ................59, 62  
sRGB ..............................................92  
Standard..................................66, 200  
Stills J Image  
Vertical/horizontal AF point........... 226  
Video system................................ 170  
View on TV........................... 163, 170  
Viewfinder....................................... 20  
Diptric adjustment .................... 40  
VIV(printing)............................. 194  
oice memo  
Playback .................................. 175  
Recording................................. 174  
Volume (Movie playback) ............. 166  
W
Warm tone (printing)..................... 194  
WB J White balance  
WFT settings .................................. 48  
White balance................................. 72  
Bracketing.................................. 80  
Color temperature setting .......... 78  
Correction .................................. 79  
Custom....................................... 73  
Stopped-down aperture ................111  
Strap ...............................................26  
Superimposed display...................225  
System extension terminal..............18  
System map..................................244  
Personal ......................................... 72  
T
Toning effect (Monochrome) ...........69  
Trademarks...................................264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
275  
CANON INC. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan  
U.S.A.  
CANON U.S.A. INC.  
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042-1198, U.S.A.  
For all inquires concerning this product, call toll free in the U.S.  
1-800-OK-CANON  
CANADA  
CANON CANADA INC. HEADQUARTERS  
6390 Dixie Road, Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada  
CANON CANADA INC. MONTREAL BRANCH  
5990, Côte-de-Liesse, Montréal Québec H4T 1V7, Canada  
CANON CANADA INC. CALGARY OFFICE  
2828, 16th Street, N.E. Calgary, Alberta T2E 7K7, Canada  
For all inquiries concerning this product, call toll free in Canada  
1-800-OK-CANON  
EUROPE,  
CANON EUROPA N.V.  
AFRICA &  
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands  
CANON FRANCE S.A.S.  
MIDDLE EAST  
17,Quai du Président Paul Doumer, 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France  
CANON UK LTD.  
Woodhatch Reigate,Surrey RH2 8BF, United Kingdom  
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH  
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany  
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.  
Via Milano 8, 20097 San Donato Milanese, I), ly  
CANON Schweiz A.G.  
Industriestrasse 12, 8305 Dietlikon, and  
Canon GmbH  
Zetschegasse 11, A-1230 Vustr
CANON España,S.A.  
Av. De Europa,6 Acobendas adrid, Spain  
CANON PortugaS.A.  
Rua Alfredo da Silv14 Alfgide 2610-016 Amadora, Portugal  
CENTRAL &  
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.  
SOUTH AMERICA 703 Waterford Way, Suite 400 Miami, FL 33126,U.S.A.  
ASIA  
CANON (China) Co., LTD.  
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China  
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD.  
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong  
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.  
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632  
CANON KOREA CONSUMER IMAGING INC.  
Gangnam Finance Center 17F, 737,Yeoksam-Dong, Gangnam-Gu, Seoul, 135-984, Korea  
OCEANIA  
JAPAN  
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney N.S.W. 2113, Australia  
CANON NEW ZEALAND LTD.  
Akoranga Business Park, Akoranga Drive, Northcote, Auckland, New Zealand  
CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC.  
16-6, Kohnan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan  
This Instruction Manual booklet is current as of October 2009. For information on  
the camera’s compatibility with any accessories and lenses introduced after this  
date, contact any Canon Service Center.  
CT1-1034-003  
© CANON INC. 2010  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Blaupunkt CD Player A 05 User Manual
Bose Speaker 191 Pr User Manual
Boss Audio Systems Car Stereo System 610C User Manual
Braun Electric Shaver IRT3020 User Manual
Breville Coffeemaker BES920 User Manual
Califone MP3 Player 2396 User Manual
Canon Film Camera VI L User Manual
Canon Printer 8746B002 User Manual
Canon Projector LCOS Projectors User Manual
Cisco Systems Cordless Telephone 7942G User Manual